JP6533748B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  A gaming machine equipped with such an AT (ART) function may perform AT lottery whether or not to perform AT during a bonus game, and may notify the result of AT lottery at the end of the bonus game. For example, according to Patent Document 1, if there is a possibility that the bonus game may end in the remaining 2 games when the remaining payout number becomes 16 to 30 during the bonus game, the winning of AT (ART) from the bonus game screen There has been proposed a gaming machine which switches image display to a challenge notification screen for notifying presence or absence.

JP, 2012-183284, A

  By the way, since the number of medals to be awarded during the bonus game varies depending on the internal winning combination, the number of medals to be awarded is the remaining payout depending on the internal winning combination after switching the image display to the challenge notification screen. May not reach In such a case, when notifying the presence or absence of winning of AT as in Patent Document 1, processing at the end of the bonus game will be executed even though the bonus game has not ended, It will give a sense of distrust to the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a player of the end time of a state advantageous to the player such as a bonus. Do.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine in which the maximum number of gaming media to be awarded in unit games is a predetermined number, and a plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, etc.) displaying a plurality of symbols. 3R), symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reel, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91) for detecting a start operation by the player , Start switch 64), and symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, and the start operation detection means Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of winning combinations based on the detection of the start operation by Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and stopping by the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation detecting means Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the operation is detected; The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the player has won a prize, and the internal winning combination determining means If it is determined that the internal winning combination has been won, a profit giving means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for giving a number of game media according to the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and a predetermined condition Profit state start means (for example, main control circuit 91) which starts a profit state (for example, bonus state) as a trigger, and counting means (for example, for counting the number of gaming media provided by the profit giving means during the profit state) Main control circuit 91), and profit state end means (for example, main control circuit 91) which ends the profit state when the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold (for example, 59 sheets); And an effect control unit (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for controlling an effect to be executed during the profit state, wherein the effect control unit is based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit. When the number of gaming media being counted by the counting means at the timing of detection exceeds the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold value, a profit state end effect is produced as an effect at the end of the game according to the detected start operation Is registered, and the game medium is provided by the profit giving means in the game according to the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, as a result of which the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold If it is, the registered profit state end effect is executed, and if the number of gaming media counted by the counting means is less than the threshold value, the registered profit state end effect is obtained. It is characterized by changing to continuation presentation and performing the said profit state continuation presentation.

  In such a gaming machine, when there is a possibility that the number of gaming media provided during the profit state may exceed the threshold at the timing when the start operation is detected, the profit state end effect is displayed as the effect at the end of the game. Register. At this time, depending on the number of gaming media actually awarded in the game, the number of gaming media awarded during the profit state may not exceed the threshold, so in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the gaming, Based on the result of the provision of the game medium, the registered profit state end effect is changed to a profit state continued effect. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, although the profit status end effect is registered once at the start of the game where the profit status may end, if the profit status does not end as a result of the game, The profit state continuation effect is executed without executing the profit state end effect. This makes it possible to prevent the effect at the end of the profit state from being executed despite the fact that the profit state is not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the end time of the profit state. .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the end time of the profit state.

It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram of a display with which the above-mentioned pachislot is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the said pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the subcontrol circuit of the said pachislot. It is an exploded view of the rotating part of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a perspective view of the rotary part in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a perspective view of a rotary part in the state where the eyeball member of the above-mentioned pachislot has rotated to the right. It is the perspective view which looked at the eyeball member of the above-mentioned pachislot, left-eye back member, and right-eye back member from the back. It is a top view of the rotary part in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotary part in a state where the eyeball member of the pachislot has started to rotate rightward from the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotary part in a state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a bottom view of the rotary part in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotary part in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot has started to rotate rightward from the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotary part in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a figure showing the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition conditions of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the carrying-over combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area provided in main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the transition flow of the gaming state controlled by the sub control circuit of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence of the classification of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the said pachislot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the management method of the production | presentation ball in the said pachislot. FIG. 5 is a schematic view of a transition lottery in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the start ART lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the start ART lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the start ART lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse operation | movement lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a MAP data correspondence table showing MAP data defined in apocalypse MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball at the time of the apocalypse operation production ball lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the promotion method of the production | presentation ball used during a normal gaming state and a high probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows the gift movable lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the production ball promotion lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of reel stop stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot machine. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the high probability gaming state of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the CZ of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ_MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot machine. It is a CZ_MAP corresponding | compatible table which shows the CZ mode prescribed | regulated to CZ_MAP. It is a figure which shows the invalid point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ inside production ball lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence of the classification of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the said pachislot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by a sub control circuit. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in BB of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART extraction table at the time of start in BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the BB inside mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the BB inside mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of completion | finish in BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in ART of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in ART of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the boss | hub MAP extraction table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a boss | hub MAP data corresponding | compatible table which shows boss | hub MAP data prescribed | regulated to boss | hub MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in hostile determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in hostile determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation ball upgrade lottery table in hostile determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the hostile determination ART middle ally power addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the boss power lottery table in hostile determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a boss status correspondence table showing the status of the opponent in battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table showing battle MAP data specified in battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation ball lottery table in battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage random determination table in battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage random determination table in battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process of the said pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task of sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the display method of the non-effect image in panel display. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the gift control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation content determination processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows CZ * ART lottery process at the time of normal start of the sub CPU of the pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows apocalypse operation processing of sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart showing high probability gaming state transition processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability in-progress effect registration processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start of a sub CPU of the pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing during BB of sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in ART of sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during enemyization ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows processing during battle ART of a sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of winning a prize operation command reception of the sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows CZ * ART lottery process at the time of the normal end of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability transfer determination processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability end determination processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result management process in CZ of the sub CPU of the pachislot machine mentioned above. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of bonus end command reception of the sub CPU of the pachislot machine mentioned above. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the rewriting method of the production | presentation ball used during enemy determination ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ART lottery process in BB of sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of winning a prize operation command reception of sub CPU of pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows production control processing during BB of sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine showing one embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing a game. In addition to the medals, coins, gaming balls, point data or tokens for gaming may be applied as gaming media. Further, in the present embodiment, a function in which the replay probability is higher than that between normal times between an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") which is a function of navigating establishment of a specific small combination with a lamp etc. A pachislot machine equipped with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function at the same time as RT, which is an RT, will be described.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachislot 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side of the pachislot 1, the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side, and the right and left sides of the pachislot 1 are viewed from the player. They are referred to as (rightward) and left (leftward) respectively. Moreover, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. A direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction.

[Pachislot functional flow]
As shown in FIG. 1, when the player inserts a medal and the start lever 16 is operated, the pachislot 1 is set to one value from random numbers in a range (for example, 0 to 65535) of a predetermined numerical value (for example, Hereinafter, random number values are extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means is based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game on the start lever 16 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 4) (the establishment of a predetermined start condition), with a predetermined probability among the plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning combination.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitting display along a pay line to be described later is determined. In addition, as types of combinations of symbols, there are provided one to which the player is given a privilege such as payout of medals, activation of replay (replay), activation of bonus, etc., and other related to so-called “off”. It is done.

  Subsequently, after the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 described later) plays an internal winning combination. Control of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the timing when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed.

  Here, in the pachi slot 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to 4 symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces Determined in).

  When an internal winning combination permitting display of a combination of symbols relating to winning is determined, the reel stop control means utilizes the prescribed time, and the combination of the symbols is along the pay line as an effective line. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reel is used in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so as not to be displayed along the pay line using the above-mentioned prescribed time Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  In this way, when the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are all stopped, the prize determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the prize line relates to a prize It judges whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the establishment or failure of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the pay line, based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Then, when it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation of the reel stop operation (the operation of the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) which is initially performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed subsequent to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine, in the above-described series of flows, display of an image performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, output of light performed by various lamps, output of sound performed by a speaker, drive of a rotating character, Or various effects are performed using these combinations.

  When the start lever is operated, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines by lottery the one to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is carried by a sub control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means interlocks with respective triggers such as the start of the rotation of the reels, the stop of the rotations of the respective reels, the determination of the presence or absence of winning, etc. to execute the corresponding effects. As described above, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity or opportunity to know the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the presentation content corresponding to the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest can be improved.

[Structure of Pachislot]
Next, with reference to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the structure of the pachislot in the present embodiment will be described. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi slot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic view of the display device 10 of the pachi slot 1. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a as a housing for accommodating a reel, a circuit board and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (in FIG. 2, only the handle 2c on one side is shown). The handle 2 c is a recess to which the pachi slot 1 is transported.

  A plurality of (for example, 21 in the present embodiment) reels 3L, 3C, 3R (FIG. 3) in which a plurality (for example, 21) of symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction inside the cabinet 2a. Reference) is housed. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. The above-mentioned plural (for example, 21) designs are drawn on the surface of the above-mentioned sheet material.

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9 and a display device 10 for displaying a predetermined effect. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi slot 1.

  Moreover, the front door 2b has the display window 4 which can visually recognize three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The display window 4 is composed of three left display windows 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions overlapping the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side Provided to be located at Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are continuously arranged among the plural types of symbols drawn on the respective reels when the rotation of the corresponding reels provided behind them is stopped. It is set to the size which can display three designs. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. Then, in the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning line for determining whether or not winning is achieved.

<Overview of Display Device 10>
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 3, the display device 10 includes the liquid crystal display device 11 and a panel device 400 provided on the front surface (player side) of the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, by causing the liquid crystal display device 11 and the panel device 400 to cooperate with each other, the display device 10 displays an image relating to an effect on a game and information about the game.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 executes effects by displaying images, for example, when an error occurs in customization of the pachislot 1 or game table information such as a game history (which may hereinafter be called a menu screen) or the pachislot 1 It is possible to display an error screen for conveying the contents of the error to the store clerk of the game shop. In addition, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 with the execution of the effect may be referred to as a “effect image”, and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the effect like a menu screen or an error screen. It may be called "non-effect image".

  The panel device 400 is a so-called panel device for illumination array (registered trademark), and includes a transparent light guide plate 401 and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 403 disposed on the side of the light guide plate 401. The light guide plate 401 is a transmissive panel having transparency such as an acrylic material. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light guide plate 401 is formed with a plurality of recesses (reflection recesses 402a) having a reflection surface for reflecting the light along the plate surface to the player side, and the plurality of reflections A latent image 402 shown in FIG. 3A is formed by the concave portion 402a.

  The LED 403 is disposed to the side of the light guide plate 401, and emits light along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401. As such LED403, the LED array etc. which provided many LED in linear form are used suitably. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light emitted along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401 with the light emission of the LED 403 is reflected to the front surface (player side) by the reflective recess 402a, and is formed by the reflective recess 402a. Latent image 402 is visible to the player.

  In such a display device 10, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the LED 403 does not emit light, the latent image 402 can not be visually recognized by the player, and the player can transparent the light guide plate 401. It will be recognized as a board. As a result, in the display device 10, an effect is performed according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  On the other hand, when the LED 403 is emitting light, the plurality of reflective concave portions 402a reflect light to the player side, so that the latent image 402 is visualized as shown in FIG. 3C. The person can see. In such a case, in the display device 10, an effect using the panel device 400 or an effect in which the panel device 400 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are linked are performed.

  In the present embodiment, the latent image 402 indicating the characters “CHANCE !!” is drawn on the light guide plate 401, but the latent image 402 is not limited to such characters, and other characters may be used. Not only characters but also images such as the face of characters may be drawn.

  Returning to FIG. 2, a protective glass 6 is disposed on the front side of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 described above. Thus, the player can not directly touch the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 (the liquid crystal display device 11 or the panel device 400).

  Further, a decorative member 7 is attached to an upper portion on the front side of the door body 9 so as to surround the protective glass 6. The decorative member 7 constitutes a part of the exterior of the pachi slot 1 and includes an upper exterior member 7a, a pair of side exterior members 7b and a lower exterior member 7c. In particular, the upper exterior member 7a is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 11 and in front of a rotating object 200 described later.

  A pedestal 12 is formed at the center of the door body 9. The pedestal 12 includes various devices to be operated by the player (the medal insertion slot 13, the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the start lever 16, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the selection button 18, the determination button 19) is provided.

  The medal insertion slot 13 is provided to receive a medal dropped from the outside into the pachislot 1 by the player. That is, the medal insertion slot 13 is for the player to insert a medal. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 is used in one game with the preset number (for example, 3) as the upper limit, and the portion exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot 1 Can do (so-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal 12 is provided with a settlement button. The settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. The start lever 16 is for starting rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R) according to the operation of the player.

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation of the player. .

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are used when performing an operation related to information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. For example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The selection button 18 and the determination button 19 are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (for example, calling of a menu screen or operation on the menu screen). Further, the pedestal 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 formed of a 7-segment LED. The 7-segment display 28 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as benefits (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). indicate.

  In the lower part of the door main body 9, a medal payout port 21, a medal receiving tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R and the like are provided. The medal payout opening 21 guides a medal discharged by the driving of a hopper device 43 described later to the outside. The medal receiver 22 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 21. Further, the speakers 23L and 23R output sounds such as sound effects and songs corresponding to the contents of the effects.

  A waist panel 29 is provided between the pedestal 12 and the medal receiver 22, and the waist panel 29 displays various types of information such as the model name and role configuration of the pachi slot 1.

<Electric configuration of pachislot machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi slot 1 has a main control board 41 disposed in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 disposed in the front door 2b. The main relay board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. ing.

  The reel relay terminal board 51 is disposed inside the reel bodies of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal outputted from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor.

  The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi slot 1. An external concentrated terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The cabinet side relay board 53 relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the external concentrated terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentrated terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentrated terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal and a security signal to the outside of the pachi slot 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates a medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals. A power switch 44 a is connected to the power supply substrate 44 b of the power supply device 44.

  When the power switch 44 a is ON, the power of the pachi slot 1 is turned on, and the power supply 44 supplies the necessary power to the pachi slot 1. When the power switch 44a is turned off, the power of the pachi slot 1 is cut off, and the supply of power from the power supply device 44 to the pachi slot 1 is stopped. In the door relay terminal board 54, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the determination switch 68 and the sub The relay board 69 is connected.

  That is, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the determination switch 68 and the sub relay board 69 It is connected to the main control board 41 via the relay terminal plate 54.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door opening and closing monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening and closing of the front door 2 b to the outside of the pachi slot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) are pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the player has operated the start lever 16 (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment indicator 28 when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are able to rotate and replay is performed when the insertion of the medals is received. It is a substrate for A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of the game and a mark for performing the re-game.

  The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button 18 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The determination switch 68 detects that the determination button 19 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. Then, the main control board 41 outputs the detection result output from the selection switch 67 or the determination switch 68 to the sub control board 42 as necessary.

  The sub relay board 69 relays a wire connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub relay board 69 relays a wire connecting the sub control board 42 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub control board 42. That is, the sub relay board 69 is electrically connected to the sub control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24 h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating object control board 78. There is.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal plate 54 and the sub relay board 69. Further, the sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24 h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating object control board 78 through the sub relay board 69. ing.

  The sound I / O substrate 71 outputs sound to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 causes the LED group 25 showing one specific example of the light source to emit light in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6), and displays the blinking pattern. The LED board 72 controls the LED group 25 for illuminating the waist panel 29 and the decorative member 7 and the LEDs provided on the rotary part 200.

  The 24h door opening and closing monitoring unit 74 stores the history of opening and closing the front door 2b. When the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

  The rotary product control board 78 drives the rotary product 200 in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6). The rotary combination 200 is driven and controlled by the rotary combination control board 78 to rotate the eyeball member 205 described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 and the rotary product control board 78 constitute a character control means, and the eyeball member 205 is a rotary product in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101. Drive control is performed by the control board 78.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76, a liquid crystal relay substrate 77, and a panel control substrate 79 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing data for effect (image), sound, light (LED group 25), and driving and communication of the rotating object 200 for presentation. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 is a substrate for relaying a wire connecting the sub control substrate 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The panel control board 79 is a board which relays a wire connecting the sub control board 42 and the LED 403 constituting the panel device 400, and performs a plurality of types of illumination display using the panel device 400. The panel control board 79 is configured with a drive circuit for inputting data as a basis of the light emission mode from the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6) of the sub control board 42, and outputs an LED control signal to the LED 403. An image corresponding to the latent image 402 is displayed on the panel device 400 in various manners.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the main control circuit 91 as a main control unit uses the microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component to control the progress of the game.

  The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95. The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control instructions (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of the control program.

  To the main CPU 93, a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99 are connected. Clock pulse generation circuit 96 and frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many reels have been rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index is provided at, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, basically, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbols of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and the respective symbols within the range up to the symbol four symbols ahead can be stopped at the middle of the display window 4 It becomes a good pattern.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control substrate 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control circuit 101 as a sub control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and determines and executes the contents of the effect based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. And the like, as well as controlling peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display 11, the rotating object 200, various LEDs, and the speakers 23L and 23R.

  The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106. The sub CPU 102 controls the output of the image, the sound, the light, and the driving of the rotary part 200 in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically comprises a program storage area and a data storage area. The program storage area stores a control program to be executed by the sub CPU 102.

  For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and a random number value for effect extraction, and an effect registration task for determining and registering effect contents (effect data) Is included. In addition, a drawing control task that controls display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, an accessory control task that controls the rotary combination 200, a lamp control task that controls light output by the light source of the LED The voice control task etc. which control the output of the sound by the speakers 23L and 23R are included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of a video. Also, a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and presentation data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub RAM 103 is configured to include a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as a work area and a backup SRAM (Static RAM), and when power is turned on, the sub control circuit is copied by copying various data stored in the SRAM to the DRAM. The various information used in 101 is restored to the content at the time of power-off.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created image. Further, the sub CPU 102 drives the rotary combination 200 based on the combination movement data specified by the effect content.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<Structure of rotating part>
Next, the rotary part 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 7 to 16. The rotary combination 200 of the present embodiment constitutes a movable combination of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the rotary product 200 is provided on the front side of the pachi slot 1 rather than the display device 10. The rotary product 200 is provided with a cover member 198 which can be opened and closed up and down. The cover member 198 constitutes the movable portion of the present invention. Further, a transparent lens 199 (not shown) is provided in front of the cover member 198 so that the player can not directly touch the rotary accessory 200.

  When the cover member 198 is opened, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotary product 200 is exposed as shown in FIG. Further, when the cover member 198 is closed, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotary combination 200 becomes invisible to the player. In addition, the rotating character 200 is a character (a gimmick) that imitates the eyes, the cover member 198 corresponds to a bag, and the eyeball main body 203 corresponds to an eyeball. The cover member 198 is opened and closed vertically by an actuator such as a motor (not shown).

  7 to 9, the rotary product 200 includes an upper base 202, an eyeball main body 203 and a lower base 204.

  The eyeball main body 203 is provided at an eyeball member 205 extending in the left-right direction of the pachislot 1, a left eye buttock member 206 provided at one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction, and the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction And the right-eye butt member 207. The rotation direction and the left and right direction of the eyeball member 205 are the rotation direction and the left and right direction as viewed from the player.

  The eyeball member 205 is formed in a hemispherical shape having a circular arc surface 205A along the extending direction, and an image 205a imitating the eyeball is formed on the circular arc surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is rotatable in the left-right direction along the arc surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is formed of a lens.

  When the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207 are not engaged with the eyeball member 205, respectively, the eyeball member 205 is disposed at a position where the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207 overlap. In addition, the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207 are provided so as to overlap behind the eyeball member 205 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the rear ends of the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207 are positioned rearward of the rear end in the width direction of the eyeball member 205.

  The front ends of the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207 are disposed in front of the eyeball member 205 so as to cover both end sides of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. It has become. Engaging protrusions 206A and 207A are formed on the back surfaces of the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, an engagement protrusion 205B is formed at one end (left end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engagement projection 205B is engageable with an engagement projection 206A formed on the back surface of the left-eye buttock member 206.

An engaging protrusion 205C is formed on the other end (right end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engagement projection 205C is engageable with an engagement projection 207A formed on the back surface of the right-eye buttock member 207.

  The engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye bottom member 206 is located inward of the engagement protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. As a result, when the eye ball member 205 rotates in the right direction, which is one side in the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A. Thereafter, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates in the right direction, the left-eye buttock member 206 moves in the rightward direction together with the eyeball member 205.

The engagement projection 207A of the right-eye buttock member 207 is located inward of the engagement projection 205C of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. Accordingly, when the eye ball member 205 rotates in the left direction, which is the other side in the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205C engages with the engagement protrusion 207A. Thereafter, when the eyeball member 205 is further rotated in the left direction, the right eye corner member 207 moves in the left direction together with the eyeball member 205.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a projecting plate 208 is provided on the back surface of the eyeball member 205, and the projecting plate 208 projects rearward from the back surface of the eyeball member 205. Three bosses 208A (only the central boss 208A is shown in FIG. 10) are provided upright on the upper surface of the projecting plate 208.

  A bush 209A is rotatably attached to the boss 208A at the boss 208A. The bush 209A is prevented from coming off with respect to the boss portion 208A by a screw 209C via a washer 209B.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper base 202 includes a base body 210 extending in the left-right direction, and a semicircular portion 211 projecting forward from the base body 210. A guide groove 210A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the base main body 210, and the rack member 212 is inserted in the guide groove 210A so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

  Rack teeth 212A are formed at the right end of the rack member 212, and the relay gear 213 meshes with the rack teeth 212A. The relay gear 213 is rotatably supported by the base body 210, and the relay gear 213 meshes with an output gear 214 A of the motor 214. The motor 214 is driven by the rotating object control board 78.

  The motor 214 is supported by the base body 210 and rotates the output gear 214A. When the output gear 214A rotates forward and reverse, the rack member 212 reciprocates in the left and right direction via the relay gear 213.

  The rack member 212 is provided with a guide piece 212B, and the guide piece 212B protrudes forward from the rack member 212. The guide piece 212B is formed with an elongated hole 212b extending in the front-rear direction. In the long hole 212b, a bush 209A attached to a boss 208A positioned at the center of three bosses 208A formed on the upper surface of the protruding plate 208 is slidably fitted.

  In the semicircular portion 211, a guide groove 211A is formed which curves in the same direction as the rotational direction of the eyeball member 205, in other words, the direction along the arc surface 205A. The above-mentioned three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide groove 211A. Of the three bushes 209A, the central bush 209A is further fitted in the elongated hole 212b through the guide groove 211A.

  Thus, when the rack member 212 moves in the left-right direction, the eyelet 205 is moved in the left-right direction by moving the central bush 209A along the guide groove 211A while moving in the front and rear direction in the long hole 212b. Rotate.

  Engaging pieces 206 </ b> B and 207 </ b> B are formed on upper portions of the left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11 to 13, guide grooves 210B and 210C are formed in the base main body 210, and the guide grooves 210B and 210C extend in the same direction as the rotational direction of the eyeball member 205. There is. The engaging pieces 206B and 207B are engaged with the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and the left and right corner members 206 and 207C are respectively guided by the guide grooves 210B and 210C and rotate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 14 to 16, guide grooves 204A and 204B are formed in the lower base 204, and the guide grooves 204A and 204B extend in the same direction as the rotational direction of the eyeball member 205. doing.

  A pair of bushes 215A and 215B are rotatably provided at the lower part of the left eye corner member 206, and the bushes 215A and 215B are slidably fitted in the guide groove 204A. A pair of bushes 215C and 215D are rotatably provided at the lower part of the right-eye back member 207, and the bushes 215C and 215D are slidably fitted in the guide groove 204B.

  Thereby, the engagement pieces 206B and 207B are guided to the guide grooves 210B and 210C of the upper base 202, and the bushes 215A, 215B, 215C and 215D are guided to the guide grooves 204A and 204B of the lower base 204. The left-eye base member 206 and the right-eye base member 207 are stably moved in the rotational direction of the eyeball member 205.

  In FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the left-eye base member 216 and the right-eye base member 217 are fixed to the lower base 204. The left-eye buttock member 216 and the right-eye buttock member 217 are located in front of the movable left-eye buttock member 206 and the right-eye buttock member 207, and when the eyeball member 205 is positioned at the neutral position. It covers part of the from the front. The state in which the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position is a state in which the image 205a imitating the eyeball of the eyeball member 205 is directed to the front, as shown in FIGS.

  When the eyeball member 205 is in the neutral position, the left-eye buttock member 216 covers the left half of the left-eye buttock member 206. On the other hand, the right half of the left-eye back member 206 is not covered by the left-eye back member 216 and is visible from the front. The right-eye buttock member 217 covers the right half of the right-eye buttock member 207. On the other hand, the left half of the right-eye back member 207 is not covered by the right-eye back member 217, and is visible from the front.

  In FIG. 7 and FIG. 14, one end of a wire 218 is attached to a bush 215A of the left-eye buttock member 206, and the other end of the wire 218 is attached to one end of a coil spring 219. The other end of the coil spring 219 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 219 biases the left-eye buttock member 206 in the left direction, which is the other rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

  A pulley 220 is provided between the coil spring 219 and the left eye butt member 206, and the pulley 220 is in sliding contact with the wire 218, and the coil spring 219 is lateral to one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction The wire 218 is bent to be located on the left side).

  One end of a wire 221 is attached to a bush 215C of the right-eye buttock member 207, and the other end of the wire 221 is attached to one end of a coil spring 222. The other end of the coil spring 222 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 222 biases the right-eye buttock member 207 in the right direction, which is one direction of rotation of the eyeball member 205.

  A pulley 223 is provided between the coil spring 222 and the right-eye butt member 207, and the pulley 223 comes in sliding contact with the wire 221, and the coil spring 222 is lateral to one end of the eyeball member 205 The wire 221 is bent so as to be located on the right side.

  Here, the rotating product 200 is provided with an LED substrate (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and the LED substrate is provided behind the eyeball member 205. The eyeball member 205 is irradiated from the rear by the LED, and the light illuminated on the eyeball member 205 is irradiated to the front of the pachi slot 1 through the lens 199.

  In the rotary product 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, when the output gear 214A is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the motor 214 from the state where the eye ball member 205 is at the neutral position, The rack member 212 moves to the right. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the long hole 212b is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  The three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 211A formed in the semicircular portion 211. Therefore, when the central bush 209A is pressed in the right direction by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 And rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  The guide groove 211A is curved in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, and the three bushes 209A move rightward along the curved guide groove 211A. The central bush 209A is slidably fitted in the long hole 212b of the guide piece 212B of the rack member 212, and the long hole 212b extends along the longitudinal direction of the pachi slot 1 When the bush 209A moves rightward along the guide groove 211A, the eyeball member 205 smoothly rotates along the guide groove 211A as the central bush 209A slides in the front-rear direction along the long hole 212b. .

  When the eyeball member 205 moves in the right direction, the engagement projection 206A of the left eye buttock member 206 engages with the engagement projection 205B formed on one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction (FIGS. 12 and 13) Reference), the rear of the eyeball member 205 moves in the right direction together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping the end portion in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with the left eye bottom member 206.

  When the left-eye buttock member 206 moves in the right direction, the wire 218 pulls the coil spring 219 as shown in FIG. 16 from the moment (the state of FIG. 15) when the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A. The coil spring 219 extends and biases the left-eye buttock member 206 to the left.

  The engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye butt member 206 is positioned inward of the engagement protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. Even if it moves, the left-eye butt member 206 is not pulled by the coil spring 219 and pulled back to the left. Thus, the eyeball member 205 moves to the right. FIG. 9, FIG. 13, and FIG. 14 show the state in which the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum movement position in the right direction.

  When the output gear 214A is rotated clockwise by the motor 214 from the state in which the eyeball member 205 is moved to the maximum movement position in the right direction, the rack member 212 moves in the left direction via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed in the left direction by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 is rotated leftward toward the neutral position, the left-eye buttock member 206 is pulled by the coil spring 219 so as to move leftward together with the eyeball member 205. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum movement position in the right direction to the neutral position, the left-eye buttock member 206 returns to the initial position. The state in which the eyeball member 205 moves from the right to the neutral position is shown in the order of FIG. 13 (FIG. 16), FIG. 12 (FIG. 15) and FIG. 11 (FIG. 14).

  When the output gear 214A is rotated clockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is positioned at the neutral position, the rack member 212 is moved leftward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the long hole 212b is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  When the three bushes 209A move leftward along the guide groove 211A, the eyelet 205 is smoothly moved along the guide groove 211A by the central bush 209A sliding in the longitudinal direction along the long hole 212b. Rotate.

  Further, when the eye ball member 205 moves in the left direction, the engagement projection 207A of the right eye corner member 207 engages with the engagement projection 205C formed on the other end of the eye ball member 205 in the extension direction, whereby the eye ball member At the rear of 205, the right buttocks member 207 is movable in the left direction together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extension direction.

  When the right-eye buttock member 207 moves in the left direction, the wire 221 pulls the coil spring 222 to extend the coil spring 222 and bias the right-eye buttock member 207 in the rightward direction. The engagement protrusion 207A of the right-eye buttock member 207 is located inward of the engagement protrusion 205C of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. Even if it moves, the right-eye butt member 207 is not pulled by the coil spring 222 and pulled back to the right. Thus, the eyeball member 205 moves in the left direction.

  When the output gear 214A is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state in which the eyeball member 205 is moved to the maximum movement position in the left direction, the rack member 212 is moved in the right direction via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates in the right direction toward the neutral position, the right-eye buttock member 207 is pulled by the coil spring 219 so as to move in the rightward direction together with the eyeball member 205. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum movement position in the left direction to the neutral position, the right-eye buttock member 207 returns to the initial position.

  As described above, by rotating the eyeball member 205 between the right direction and the left direction through the neutral position, it is possible to perform an effect as if the eyeball moves in the left-right direction.

[Transition flow of main game state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 manages the gaming state on the basis of the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 17, the main control circuit 91 distinguishes between a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state, based on the presence / absence of winning / activation of the bonus (BB). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a bonus non-winning state and the bonus is not activated, the inter-flag state is a bonus winning and a bonus not activated, and the bonus state Is in the state where the bonus is activated.

  Further, the main control circuit 91 provides six types of states, the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and their winning probability differ from each other. The RT0 gaming state to RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the role associated with the replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state are the internal winnings associated with the replay. It is a gaming state in which the probability determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role associated with replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high, and is the most advantageous gaming state among bonus non-winning states.

  The main control circuit 91 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state and the bonus state distinguished based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / action, and the RT0 game distinguished based on the type of internal winning combination involved in replay and its winning probability. Manage the gaming state of the main side in Pachislot 1 from state ~ RT5 gaming state. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 sets the gaming state in Pachi-Slot 1 as RT0 gaming state in bonus non-earning state, RT1 gaming state in bonus non-earning state, RT2 gaming state in bonus non-earning state, bonus non-earning state RT3 gaming state, bonus non winning state RT4 gaming state, flag between state RT5 gaming state, bonus state RT0 gaming state, bonus state RT2 gaming state, bonus state RT4 gaming state, and bonus state RB gaming state Manage 10 different states.

  The presence or absence of a bonus winning is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4, it means that a bonus is won. Further, the presence or absence of the bonus operation and the RT gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storage area, the bonus (BB gaming state) is in operation and the RT4 gaming state is established.

  Bonus non winning condition RT0 gaming state (bit 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data of internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of all bits of gaming state flag storing area is 0) Is one of the basic gaming states during bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non winning state, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non winning state, the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non winning state, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non winning state, and the state between flags There is a possibility of shifting to the RT5 gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT0 gaming state where the bonus is not won, (1) when the combination of symbols pertaining to a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus is not won. Transition to the RT1 gaming state. In addition, a bell spilled eye is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is determined in a pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell when a pressing order bell described later is determined as an internal winning combination. The RT1 transition ripple is a combination of symbols displayed when the incorrect order is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order lip, when the pressing order lip described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of symbols related to (2) RT4 transition ripple is displayed, it shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct order of pressing defined for each type of pressing order lip is given, or when the pressing order lip to be described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when "F_chance lip 2" or "F_slip chance lip 2" is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when a combination of symbols relating to (3) RT3 transition lip is displayed, it shifts to the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (5) If the role related to the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, it shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags. In addition, the role which concerns on BB is either of the below-mentioned "F_black black black" "F_red red red" "F_white white white" "F_red red white" "F_white white red". The roles associated with these BBs are so-called carryovers that are carried over as an internal winning combination until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed when determined as an internal winning combination (that is, while the operation of the BB starts). It is a role.

  Subsequently, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 0 of gaming state flag storing area) 1) is one of the basic gaming states during bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state between flags. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT1 gaming state where the bonus is not won, (4) when the number of fixed games (five games in this embodiment) elapses, the RT0 game where the bonus is not won is Transition to the state. In addition, in the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (5) If the role related to the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, it shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT2 gaming state of bonus non winning condition (bit 2 of data of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and data of bit 1 of gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a gaming state in which there is a possibility of transitioning after the BB operation is completed. In this embodiment, when the bonus ends, the bonus game is shifted to the bonus non-winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is shifted when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state may shift to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state and the RT5 gaming state between the flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state, (1) when the combination of symbols related to the bell spill is displayed, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state Migrate to In addition, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (5) If the role related to the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, RT3 gaming state of bonus non winning state (bit 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data of internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and data of bit 2 of gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a gaming state in which there is a high probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination, as compared to the RT0 gaming state which is the basic gaming state of Pachi-Slot 1. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state between flags. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when (4) the number of fixed games (five games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 game in the bonus non-winning state Transition to the state. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (5) If the role related to the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT4 gaming state of bonus non winning state (bit 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and data of bit 3 of gaming state flag storing area is 1) is an advantageous state in which it is possible to play a game without reducing the medals with the highest probability that the role related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state between flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state, (1) when the combination of symbols pertaining to a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-earning state Transition to the RT1 gaming state. In addition, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (5) If the role related to the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, RT5 gaming state of the state between the flag (bit 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 is either 1 data and bit 4 of gaming state flag storage area The data 1) is between the so-called BB flags where the part associated with the BB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and the game stays until a combination of symbols according to the BB carried over as an internal winning combination is displayed It is a state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state may shift to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT5 gaming state between flags, a combination of symbols according to (6) BB carried over is displayed, and when BB is activated, RT0 in the bonus state Transition to the game state.

  The RT0 gaming state in the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and 0 of bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 5 of gaming state flag storage area is 1): When BB is activated, it is the game state which stays first. While in the bonus state, it starts from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, and shifts to another gaming state. As shown in FIG. 17, the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state may shift to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, it shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus ends) RT gaming state is maintained). The operation of the BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, (7) when the combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, it shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. The role associated with JACIN is any of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", and "F_JACIN3" described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 described later, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a high probability that the role associated with JACIN will be determined as an internal winning combination (about 52%), basically the BB operation is Before the end, the part associated with JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, and it shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. The roles associated with these JACINs are as internal winnings only during the bonus state until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed when determined as internal winnings (that is, until activation of RB starts). It is a so-called carryover role that is carried over.

  In addition, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state (bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is the role associated with JACIN. It is between so-called RB flags in the bonus state, carried over as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 17, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state may shift to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RB gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, it shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus ends, RT gaming state is maintained). In addition, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, (8) a combination of symbols according to the JACIN carried over is displayed, and when the RB is activated, the gaming state shifts to the RB gaming state in the bonus state.

  In addition, RB gaming state of bonus state (bit 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and data of bit 0 to 3 of internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and bit 5 and 6 of gaming state flag storage area The data of 1) is a gaming state in which transition is made when the operation of the RB starts during the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 33, which will be described later, in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, the probability of “disengaging” being determined as an internal winning combination is high (approximately 65%), which is basically disadvantageous. In the pachislot 1 of the form, during the bonus state, the game is performed while maintaining the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state without displaying combinations of symbols according to the carried over JACIN.

  As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RB gaming state in the bonus state shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, when the operation of (10) BB ends in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, it shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. In addition, in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (9) RB ends, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state is entered. In addition, the operation of RB is that a combination of symbols other than "off" is displayed eight times in the RB gaming state in the bonus state (eight wins), and 12 games are played in the RB gaming state in the bonus state If any of the following conditions is satisfied, or the operation of BB is completed, the process is terminated.

  In addition, RT2 gaming state of bonus state (bit 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and data of bit 0 to 3 of internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and bit 1 and bit 5 of gaming state flag storage area The data of 1) is a gaming state in which the RB gaming state in the bonus state transitions after the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 17, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state may shift to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, it shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (the RT gaming state is maintained around the end of the bonus). In addition, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, (7) when the combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, it shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes an RT control means, and based on the determined internal winning combination, the RT gaming state between the RT0 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state according to each transition condition. Migrate

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 represents by data the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to each of the symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotational direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  As types of symbols, "White 7", "Red 7", "BAR", "Rip 1", "Rip 2", "Rip 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and " "Bell" is included.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 assigns the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) to the symbol position "0" when the reel index is detected, and the reel 3L. In order to move in the rotational direction, 3C and 3R, the correspondence relationship in which the symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols is defined.

  Thus, by using the middle level of the display window 4 as a reference, it is possible to specify the type of the symbol located in the middle level of the display window 4 for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

<Symbol code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 19, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by data of 1 byte (8 bits). The symbol code table shown in FIG. 19 represents a code for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment are "White 7", "Red 7", "BAR", "Rip 1", "Rip 2", "Rip 3", "Cherry 1", as described above. There are ten types of "cherry 2", "watermelon" and "bell".

  In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "red 7" symbol (symbol code 2). For the "BAR" symbol (symbol code 3), "00000011" is assigned as data.

  Similarly, for each of “Rip 1”, “Rip 2”, “Rip 3”, “Cherry 1”, “Cherry 2”, “Watermelon” and “Bell” symbols (pattern code 4 to 10) As data, “00000100” to “00001010” are assigned.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of benefit, and a combination of the symbols and data stored in the main RAM 95 when the combination of the symbols is displayed. Define the correspondence with the benefits of (the number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, winning is achieved when the combination of symbols displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the payline matches the combination (combination) of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined that Then, when it is determined that the player has won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, activation of replay, and activation of a bonus game. When the combination of symbols displayed along the pay line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it becomes a so-called "off". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of “off” is defined by not defining the combination of symbols corresponding to “off” in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and an item of "displacement" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "displacement".

  Data fields in the symbol combination table define information for identifying combinations of symbols displayed along pay lines. Specifically, in the data column, "storage area (data for specifying a display combination storage area (see FIG. 61) described later)" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and the storage area "Data (data for specifying a bit according to a combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" to be stored is defined. In the present embodiment, by using 45 1-byte storage areas, the combination of the respective symbols is determined. For example, “R_RT transition point A_01” shown in FIG. 20 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storing area 1.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the pay line when the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. In each combination, a combination name according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols constituting the combination is defined.

  Further, the payout number specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 30, when the combination "C_CD bell" is displayed, ten medals will be paid out.

  In this embodiment, the combination of many symbols shown in FIGS. 20-32 is classified into a plurality of types according to the role. The role type column in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in the present embodiment, combinations of a large number of symbols are classified into six types of "RT transition item", "BB", "JACIN", "replay", "RT transition replay", and "winning".

  The role type “RT transition” is a combination of symbols in which transition of the RT gaming state is performed when displayed, and “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition F_08” shown in FIG. 20 correspond. . These "RT transition points" are combinations of symbols displayed when the incorrect order is determined in the pressing order determined for each of the above-described pressing order bell types, and are the above-mentioned "bell spilled eyes". That is, the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the push order, there is a possibility that any one of the combinations of symbols corresponding to the combination type "RT transition" is displayed. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type "RT transition" is displayed, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT1 gaming state.

  The role type “BB” is a combination of symbols in which the operation of the BB is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_BB1” to “C_BB5_02” shown in FIG. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type "BB" is displayed, the operation of the BB is started, and the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  The role type “JACIN” is a combination of symbols in which the operation of the RB is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_JACIN1” to “C_JACIN3” shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type "JACIN" is displayed, the operation of the RB is started, and the game shifts to the RT2 gaming state after the completion of the operation of the RB.

  The role type “replay” is a combination of symbols in which the operation of replay is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CU white” to “C_KY lip _09” shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type "re-play" is displayed, the re-play operation is performed. In addition, when the combination of the symbol corresponding to role combination "re-playing" is displayed, transfer of RT gaming state is not performed.

  The role type “RT transition replay” is a combination (combination) of symbols that, when displayed, may cause transition of the RT gaming state with the operation of replay, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 28. _01 "to" C_Sui FKF_18 "correspond. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type “RT transition replay” is displayed, the replay may be activated and transition to various RT gaming states may be performed according to the combination of the symbols.

  For example, when “C_CU ripple _01” to “C_CU ripple _03” shown in FIG. 22 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. These “C_CU Lip _01” to “C_CU Lip _03” are combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the incorrect order is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order lip described above, and “RT 1 It is a migration lip. That is, if the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the push order is incorrect, one of “C_CU lip _ 01” to “C_CU lip _ 03” is displayed.

  When “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT4 gaming state. These “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” are the above-mentioned “RT4 transition lip”. More specifically, if the above-described push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, and the push order is the correct answer, any one of “C_CU lip _ 01” to “C_CU lip _ 03” is displayed. In addition, when "F_chance lip 2" or "F_ slip chance lip 2" described above is determined as an internal winning combination, any one of "C_C lip 01" to "C_bell FKC_12" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. It will be.

  Further, when “C_CD Cherip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 28 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 gaming state. These “C_CD Cherip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” are the “RT3 transition lip” described above. More specifically, when the above-mentioned "F_ slip chance lip 1" or "F_ cherry lip" is determined to be the internal winning combination, any of "C_CD Cherip A_01" to "C_ slip FKF_18" It will be displayed.

  The winning combination type "prize" is a combination of symbols for which payout of medals is performed when displayed, and corresponds to "C_CD watermelon" to "C_B bell BB_04" shown in FIGS. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type "winning" is displayed, the number of medals specified in the number-of-payouts column of the symbol combination table is paid out. In addition, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination type "winning" is displayed, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  “C_CD bell” shown in FIG. 30 is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct order is set for the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell described above. In addition, among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the combination type "winning", the combination of symbols of the payout number "3" is displayed when the incorrect order is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of pushing order bell described above It is a combination of possible designs. That is, in the case of an incorrect answer determined for each push bell type, the combination of symbols with the payout number “3” of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination “winning” or the winning combination “RT transition” A combination of symbols corresponding to "eye" will be displayed. In addition, since there are six possible pushing orders in the pachislot 1 as the pushing order of the stop operation, the symbol combination displayed in the case of incorrect answering order is arbitrarily set from the five pushing orders of incorrect answers. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, an internal lottery table to be referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines lottery value information on data pointers corresponding to winning combinations. In the above-mentioned bonus non-winning RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “RT0” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly the bonus non-winning RT1 gaming state ̃bonus non In the winning RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “RT1” to “RT4” column of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT5 gaming state between flags, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the "RT5" column of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the "BB in (RT0)" column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the RT4 gaming state or bonus in the bonus state. In the RT2 gaming state of the state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the "BB in (RT4)" or "BB in (RT2)" column of the internal lottery table, and the RB gaming state in the bonus state Then, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RB)” column of the internal lottery table.

  The internal lottery table basically changes the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of RT gaming state, and according to the presence or absence of a bonus (BB or RB) operation The type of winning combination (other than replay and carryover) determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data used to determine a storage area type and 1-byte data. As the data pointer, a small winning combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of the plurality of winning numbers.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the random value for lottery which is extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value according to each winning combination, and the result of the subtraction becomes negative or not An internal lottery is performed by making a determination (whether or not a so-called "worried" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which it is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

<Comparison chart of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
38 to 56 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the pay line in each internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the pay line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. In the winning combination, the illustration of the correspondence table is omitted for combinations of symbols that can not be displayed on the pay line (for example, in the winning combination “F_black and black shown in FIG. 38, etc., FIG. The combination of the symbols shown in can not be displayed, so the illustration of the correspondence table is omitted).

  Referring to FIG. 38, for example, when the winning combination “F_black and black and black” is an internal winning combination, the symbol combination of the combination name “C_BB1” can be stopped and displayed on the pay line. Referring to FIG. 21, the combination name “C_BB1” is a combination of symbols in which “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed along a pay line. In addition, in the correspondence table shown in the same figure, although the case where it becomes winning combination "disapproval" is not specified, this is a combination of all the symbols specified by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of is not permitted.

  In Pachi-Slot 1, the main control circuit 91 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. Although the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 56 list combinations of all symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 91 stops the combination. Since the control differs depending not only on the internal winning combination but also on the current gaming state, even if the combination of symbols circled in correspondence to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Summary of the Title>
This point will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58. As shown in FIG. 57, when “off” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of all combinations of symbols specified by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is not permitted. In the RT4 gaming state where there is a high probability that the role associated with the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability that "off" is determined as the internal winning combination decreases with an increase in the winning probability of the role associated with the replay. Therefore, in the following, there may be a case where "Rear" in the RT4 gaming state is used as a rare role (this is treated as so-called "pure out").

  In addition, when one of “F_black black black” “F_red red red” “F_white white white” “F_red red white” “F_white white red” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIG. The display of combinations of symbols having a relationship is permitted. When one of “F_black black black” “F_red red red” “F_white white white” “F_red red white” “F_white white red” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above, The gaming state is RT5 gaming state between flags.

  In addition, when one of “F_Maintenance Lip 1” and “F_Maintenance Lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is permitted. It should be noted that “F_Maintenance Lip 1” and “F_Maintenance Lip 2” do not shift the RT gaming state even if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed.

  Further, “F_123 lip” to “F_2nd lip” are the above-described push-to-push lip, and when any of these push-to-rip dips is determined as an internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of symbols is permitted. More specifically, when the correct order is the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order lip, the above-mentioned RT4 transitioning lip (FIG. 22 to FIG. 22) of combinations of symbols having correspondences shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of symbols according to FIG. 24) is permitted, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the above-mentioned RT1 transitional lip (see FIG. 22) of the combinations of the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIG. The display of the combination of symbols according to) is permitted.

  The name of the winning combination as the pushing order lip is determined based on the pushing order that is the correct answer. For example, “1” with the name “F_123 RIP” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “right”. It shows that it is ". And "123" has shown the pushing order used as a correct answer, and in the case of "F_123 rep", 1st stop operation is "left", 2nd stop operation is "middle", 3rd stop operation is "right" It is shown that it becomes correct when it is and it becomes incorrect when it is other than that. Similarly, in the case of "F_231 rep", when the first stop operation is "middle", the second stop operation is "right", and the third stop operation is "left", the correct answer is given, and in the case of any other push order. Indicates that it is an incorrect answer. “F — 2nd Rip” is a correct answer when the first stop operation is “medium” and an incorrect answer in the case of any other pressing order.

  Referring back to FIG. 57, “F_123 upper stage 7 ten” to “F — 2nd cross 7 sets” are winning combinations different in stop control depending on not only the internal winning combination but also the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_123 upper stage 7 ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are the above-described pushing order lip, and when the pushing order is correct, the correspondence shown in FIG. 39 to FIG. 43 The display of the combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 transition ripple (see FIGS. 22 to 24) among the combinations of symbols is permitted, and in the case of incorrect answer in the pushing order, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) among the combinations of symbols is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper stage 7 ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 set” are “F_123 upper stage 7 ten” among combinations of symbols of combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white 02” shown in FIG. The display of a combination of symbols having a correspondence relationship with “...” and “F_2nd cross 7 alignment” is permitted. Here, combinations of symbols of combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white 02" are pseudo lines other than the winning line among the lines connecting the upper, middle and lower lines of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols in which three or two of either "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of three "white 7" symbols or three "red 7" symbols may be referred to as a "seven match lip", and a "white 7" symbol or "red 7" A combination of symbols in which two symbols are displayed may be called "7-turn lip". Among the combination names "C_CU white"-"C_B white _02", the combination of symbols without "FK (fake)" in the combination name is "seven assault lip" and the combination name is "FK (fake)" The combination of symbols attached is "7 round lip". The lines connecting the upper, middle and lower stages of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R in a straight line are the top line connecting the upper stages, the center line connecting the middle stages, the bottom line connecting the lower stages, the cross down line connecting downward to the right, There are five lines of the cross-up line connecting upwards to the right, but since the pay line is a cross-down line, “7 Match Lips” or “7 Round Lips” are 4 pseudo lines other than cross down lines. Along with any of the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol will be displayed three or two.

  Referring to the correspondence shown in FIG. 39, in the bonus state, the display of "7 rounds lip" is permitted for "F_123 upper stage 7 ten" and "F_132 lower stage 7 ten". In addition, in the bonus state, the display of "7 sets of reps" is permitted for "F_ 312 upper row of 7 sets" to "F_2nd cross 7 sets".

  Further, “F_J1 upper stage 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower stage 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are winning combinations different in stop control depending on not only the internal winning combination but also the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning condition, the "RT F4 transition upper lip", the "F lower limit 7 lip", and the "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip regardless of the pushing order (see FIGS. 22 to 24). The display of the combination of symbols according to) is permitted. In the bonus non winning condition, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as the internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, so during the bonus non winning condition If "F_J1 upper row 7 lip", "F_J1 lower row 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are determined as internal winning combinations, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the "F_J1 upper row 7 lip", the "F_J1 lower row 7 lip" and the "F_J1 cross 7 lip" have different stop control depending on the type of the role related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination (ie, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN1”) “F_J1 Upper 7 Lips”, “F_J1 Lower 7 Lips” and “F_J1 Cross 7 Lips” are “7 Matched Lips”, except for the Cross Down Line. Along with any of the four pseudo lines, three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols will be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination (ie, "F_J1 upper row 7 lip", "F_J1 lower row 7 lip" or "F_J1 cross 7 lip" and "F_J1 lower 7 lip") "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" (if two are decided as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 Upper 7 Lips", "F_J1 Lower 7 Lips" and "F_J1 Cross 7 Lips" Among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIG. 39 to FIG. 43, combinations of symbols other than “7-set lip” are displayed.

  A state in which “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC1 flags”, and similarly, a state in which “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be “between JAC2 flags”, The state in which "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination may be called "between JAC3 flags".

  Further, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are winning combinations different in stop control depending on not only the internal winning combination but also the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are the combinations of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pushing order. Display is permitted. In the bonus non winning condition, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, so “F_J1 upper row 7 lip” in bonus non winning condition, If "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are determined as internal winning combinations, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” have different stop control depending on the type of the role associated with JACIN carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN2" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either "F_J1 upper 7 reps", "F_J1 lower 7 reps" or "F_J1 cross 7 reps" and "F_JACIN2" “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” are “Chance Lips” and they have the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. The display of a combination of symbols of any of "C_B Lip 01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" among combinations is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN1" or "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either "F_J2 Chance Rip 1" to "F_J2 Cherry Rip" and either "F_JACIN1" or "F_JACIN3" “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are “normal ripples in bonus” and have the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 50, when two heels are determined as internal winning combinations) Among the combinations of symbols, combinations of symbols other than "chance lip" are displayed.

  In addition, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are winning combinations different in stop control depending on not only the internal winning combination but also the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning condition, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are the combinations of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (refer to FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pushing order. Display is permitted. In the non bonus condition, "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming mode, and therefore, while in the bonus non winning condition, "F_J3 chance lip 1" to When "F_J3 Cherry Lip" is determined as an internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J3 Cherry Lip” is the “Chance Lip” regardless of the type of the role associated with JACIN carrying forward as the internal winning combination, as shown in FIGS. The display of a combination of symbols of any of “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among combinations of symbols having a correspondence is permitted.

  When one of "F_chance lip 1" to "F_common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, display of a combination of symbols having correspondences shown in Figs. 44 to 56 is permitted. Note that features such as the transition of the RT gaming state triggered by "F_chance lip 1" to "F_common bell" are as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 58, “F_123 bell A” to “F_321 bell D” are basically the above-described pushing order bells, and any of these pushing order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the display of the combination of the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted. More specifically, "C_CD bell (see Fig. 30)" in the combinations of symbols having the correspondence shown in Figs. 51 to 56 when the correct order is determined in the push order determined for each push order bell type. The display of the combination of symbols according to is permitted. On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect as determined for each pressing order bell type, the symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned bell spilled eyes (see FIG. 20) of the combinations of the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. In the combination of symbols or the symbol combination table, the display of combinations of symbols having a payout number of “3” (see FIGS. 30 to 32) is permitted.

  The name of the winning combination as the push order bell is determined based on the push order that is the correct answer. For example, "1" of the name "F_123 bell A" indicates that the stop operation is "left", "2" indicates that the stop operation is "medium", and "3" indicates that the stop operation is " It shows that it is "right." And "123" has shown the pushing order used as a correct answer, and in the case of "F_123 bell A", 1st stop operation is "left", 2nd stop operation is "middle", 3rd stop operation is "right" "" Indicates that it is a correct answer, and that it is an incorrect answer in the case of other push order. Similarly, in the case of "F_231 Bell A", the first stop operation is "medium", the second stop operation is "right", and the third stop operation is "left". It indicates that the case is incorrect.

  In addition, among push order bells, "F_123 Bell C" "F_123 Bell D" "F_132 Bell C" "F_132 Bell D" "F_213 Bell C" "F_213 Bell D" "F_231 Bell C" "F_231 Bell D" "F_312 Bell" C, “F_312 Bell D”, “F_321 Bell C”, and “F_321 Bell D” are winning combinations that have different stop controls depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. Specifically, in the non-flag (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state) is the above-described pushing order bell, and when the pushing order is correct, the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 In the combination of “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)”, the display of the combination of symbols according to “C_CD bell (refer to FIG. 30)” is permitted, and in the case of incorrect answer in the pushing order, The display of the combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned bell spill (see FIG. 20) or the combination of symbols with the number of payouts “3” (see FIGS. 30 to 32) in the symbol combination table is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the inter-flag state (RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state), “F_123 Bell C” “F_123 Bell D” “F_132 Bell C” “F_132 Bell D” “F_213 Bell C” “F_213 Bell D” “F_231 Bell "C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell C" and "F_321 Bell D" are combinations of symbols having correspondences shown in Figs. 51 to 56 regardless of the pressing order. The display of the combination of symbols according to "C_CD bell (see Fig. 30)" is permitted.

  When one of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2" and "F_JACIN3" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIG. 38 is permitted. In addition, when one of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2" and "F_JACIN3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2" and "F_JACIN3" determined as the internal winning combination have a combination of corresponding symbols It will be carried over as an internal winning combination until it is displayed (only in the bonus state).

  When one of "F_RB combination A" and "F_RB combination B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
59 to 65 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 59 includes 45 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of the storage area of each of these internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. The internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45 store data (data indicating combinations of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) determined based on the internal winning combination. In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 corresponds to "C_BB1" indicating a combination of symbols which can be stopped when the internal winning combination "F_black / black / black" is set. .

<Holding part storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 60 is a storage area of 2 bytes in size, which is formed of two storage areas of the carryover combination storage areas 1 and 2. The data relating to the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area.

  For example, by storing “1” in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1, it can be determined that the combination name “C_BB1” is in a state of winning “F_black and black and black” which can be stopped. The state in which "1" is stored in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the combination name "C_BB1" is displayed on the pay line.

  That is, when winning "F_black black black", in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the pay line as a display combination, "2" of the carryover combination storage area 1 " The state in which 1 is stored is maintained. Maintaining a state in which "1" is stored in bit 2 from a unit game winning a bonus to a unit game winning is referred to as so-called "carry over". In addition, “F_black black black” “F_red red red” “F_white white white” “F_red red white” “F_white white red” “F_JACIN1” corresponding to the data (combination of symbols) stored in the holding position storage area “F_JACIN2” and “F_JACIN3” are referred to as “carrying over roles”.

  When the player performs a stop operation and rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storing area is initialized but the carryover combination storing area is not initialized. By doing this, it is possible to maintain the "carried over" state.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area shown in FIG. 61 is constituted by 45 storage areas of the display combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of the storage area of each of the display combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the display combination storing area 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the display combination storing area 1 to 45, data determined based on data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. The value of the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the display combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storing area, for example, bit 0 to bit 7 of the display combination storing area 1 correspond to “R_RT transition point A_01” to “R_RT transition point C_01”, respectively.

<Playing state flag storage area>
The gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 62 stores a flag for identifying the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 91, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bit 0 to bit 6 of the gaming state flag storage area are respectively “RT1 gaming state” “RT2 gaming state” “RT3 gaming state” “RT4 gaming state” “RT5 gaming state” “BB gaming state” “RB gaming state” It corresponds.

<Actual stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 63 is one byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R that can detect a stop operation by the player, that is, valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R at which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused, and "0" is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, “1” is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, that the stop button is valid means that the stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 64 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. The pressing order storage area is one byte in size, bits 0 to 5 are used, bits 6 and 7 are unused, and "0" is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order "left → middle → right", and "1" is stored (on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is "left → middle → right". Similarly, when the pressing order is "left → right → middle", "1" is stored (turned on) in bit 1 and when the pressing order is "middle → left → right", "1" in bit 2 Is stored (on), and “1” is stored in bit 3 (on) in the case of “middle → right → left”, and “1” is stored in bit 4 in the case of “right → left → middle” (“On”), “1” is stored (on) in bit 5 in the case of “right → middle → left”.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 65 is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating combinations of symbols that may be displayed on the rotating reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are rotating, all combinations of symbols may be displayed, so "1" is stored in all corresponding bits of the symbol code storage area. Ru. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L is stopped (reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that can not be displayed as the left reel 3L stops is updated to "0".

[Transition flow of gaming state on the sub side]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the gaming state controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 manages the gaming state based on whether or not the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. As shown in FIG. 66, the sub control circuit 101 distinguishes between the general gaming state, the ART gaming state and the bonus state. Here, the general gaming state is basically a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, and the bonus state is basically a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the ART gaming state is a gaming state It is the most advantageous playing state for the disabled. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player will play a game from the normal gaming state (while holding the bonus state depending on the situation) to transition to the most advantageous ART gaming state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning condition on the main side, and the non-winning gaming state on the sub-side ART lottery. As shown in FIG. 66, the normal gaming state includes the normal gaming state, the high probability gaming state, and the CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high probability gaming state, and the CZ are gaming states different in the transition probability to the ART gaming state, the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state, and the high probability gaming state and the CZ are It is a gaming state in which the probability of transition to the ART gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning condition on the main side and the non-winning gaming condition on the sub-side ART lottery. As shown in FIG. 66, from the normal gaming state, there is a possibility of transitioning to ART gaming state, CZ, high probability gaming state, and bonus state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery to ART and CZ is performed, and in this transition lottery, when the transition to the (A1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 101 is in the normal gaming state Transition the gaming state from to the ART gaming state. In addition, in this transition lottery, when the transition to (A2) CZ is won, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to CZ. In addition, although the details of the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state will be described later, in the normal gaming state, transition to ART and CZ at two times of the reel rotation start and the reel stop in one game. Perform a lottery (A).

  Also, in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery to the high probability gaming state is also performed (B). Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when transitioning to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state by control of the gaming state on the main side, the transition to the high probability gaming state in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state lottery (B) Is done. When the transition lottery (B) is won, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state. In addition, although the details of the transition lottery (B) in the normal gaming state will be described later, in this transition lottery, the role related to the replay in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state which is the sub-normal gaming state is an internal winning combination. Based on the determined number of times, the migration lottery (B) is performed.

  In the normal gaming state, (6) a combination of symbols according to the carried over BB is displayed, and when the BB is activated, the secondary control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the bonus state. The transition to the bonus state is common to the main side and the sub side, so the detailed description will be omitted below.

  Subsequently, CZ is a gaming state corresponding to RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is not in winning state for ART lottery on the sub side. CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high probability of shifting to the ART gaming state, and continues up to 30 games. CZ is a so-called complete running type chance zone, and when CZ continues up to 30 games, ART transition is determined. On the other hand, during CZ, a transition lottery to ART is performed, and when this transition lottery is "maintained", CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is "maintained", transition to ART is performed if the transition lottery is won, but it is more advantageous when CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of transition to ART gaming state, basically, during CZ, the player plays a game without receiving the transition lottery, and if the transition lottery has been performed, the transition lottery becomes "invalid". By playing the game in such a way, CZ wants to continue for 30 games without ending. In addition, about "maintenance / invalidity" of migration lottery in CZ, it mentions later.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state. Specifically, when (C1) is won in the transition lottery to ART performed during CZ, the secondary control circuit 101 causes the gaming state to transition from CZ to the ART gaming state, and to this transition lottery ( C2) If not won, the secondary control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequently, the high probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and also in the gaming state not winning for the ART lottery on the sub side, and Transition to the high probability gaming state in the normal gaming state It is a gaming state won the lottery (B). As shown in FIG. 66, the high probability gaming state may shift to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the high probability gaming state, the transition lottery to ART is performed, and in this transition lottery, when the transition to (D1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 101 is in the high probability gaming state Transition the gaming state from to the ART gaming state. In addition, although the details of the transition lottery (D) in the high probability gaming state will be described later, basically, similarly to the transition lottery in the normal gaming state, the reel rotation start time and the reel in one game Transition to ART is carried out at two times at the time of stopping. The shift lottery (D) in the high probability gaming state has a higher probability of winning the transition to the ART than the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state.

  Further, the high probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and in the control on the main side, (E) RT4 gaming state shifts to RT1 gaming state When control is performed, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the high probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won).

  Here, as described above, the RT4 gaming state of the main side bonus non-winning state is, for example, in the case where the pushing order Lip is correct in the RT0 gaming state (sub-side normal gaming state) of the main side bonus non-winning state, etc. It is a gaming state to shift. As described above, in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, which is the most basic gaming state (= convenient for the player), the player shifts to the high probability gaming state when correct in the push order lip, to ART To favor the transition of In other words, in the Pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the player's stop operation happens to shift to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state, a penalty such as not performing ART transition lottery is given. Instead, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in Pachislot 1, a bonus non-earning RT4 gaming state that has not won the ART transition lottery can be made a transition chance segment to the ART gaming state, and a bonus non- attached with a bonus of ART is not attached. It is possible to enhance the interest of the winning RT4 gaming state.

  Also, for the player, there is a possibility of transitioning to the high probability gaming state, which is a transition chance section to the ART gaming state, when correct in the normal gaming state in pushing order, so the strategy for the stop operation in the normal gaming state Sex can be increased, and the interest during normal gaming can also be enhanced. That is, in the game characteristic where the game state which has accidentally shifted by the player's stop operation is a penalty section, the stop operation in the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is left reel so as not to receive the penalty). And so on. In this respect, as in the case of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal gaming state by performing the transition lottery to the ART without imposing the penalty, and the normal gaming state Not only the playability inside but also the operability can be enhanced.

  By the way, if the gaming state accidentally shifted by the stop operation is not a penalty section but a transition chance section to the ART gaming mode, the player's profit and the game shop's profit so as not to give the player excessive profit. It is necessary to adjust the balance with. There are many conceivable ways to adjust the balance, for example, there is also an adjustment method in which it is easier to win the transition lottery slightly compared to the normal gaming state while keeping it as the transition chance segment to the ART gaming state. In the method, the meaning of the transition opportunity section fades away. In this respect, as shown in FIG. 17, in the pachislot 1 of this embodiment, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state of the fixed game number is provided without transitioning to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state. And By providing the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state of the number of fixed games, it is possible to adjust the frequency of the accidental transition by the stop operation, and as a result, the profit of the player and the profit of the game store Balance can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the variable for adjusting the balance of profits between the two, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in playability.

  Subsequently, the bonus state is a gaming state corresponding to any of the bonus states on the main side (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIG. 66, from the bonus state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state) and the ART gaming state. Specifically, the transition to ART performed during the bonus state, when the player wins (F1), the secondary control circuit 101 causes the gaming state to transition from the bonus state to the ART gaming state when winning (F1). If (F2) is not won in this transition lottery, the secondary control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the normal gaming state after the BB operation ends. In addition, although the details of the transition lottery (F) in the bonus state will be described later, in the bonus state, when the combination of the above-mentioned “7 sets of Lips” becomes displayable, it wins ART, and BB If you win a predetermined lottery which will be done at the end of the operation of, will win the ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the secondary control circuit 101 constitutes a specific effect state starting means, and when the transition to ART is won in the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state (A1), the transition lottery in CZ When the transition to ART is won in (C) (C1), when the transition to ART is won in the transition lottery in the high probability gaming state (D), and the transition lottery in the bonus state (F) When the transition to ART is won (F1), the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which the content of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed, and corresponds to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning condition on the main side (see FIG. 17). It is the game state which won the ART lottery. In the ART gaming state, for example, when a push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts (C_CD bell with 10 payouts) is displayed. Report the pressing order of the correct answer. In addition, in the ART gaming state, for example, when the pushing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that maintain the RT4 gaming state with high probability that the combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination (for example, Inform the winning push order of the correct pushing order so that the RT4 transition lip is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the ally character and the enemy character fight (battle) during the ART gaming state, and the ART gaming state is continued when the ally character wins, and the ART is played when the enemy character wins. End the gaming state. In order to give such a playability, the ART gaming state is constituted by an enemy determination ART and a battle ART, as shown in FIG.

  The enemy determination ART is an ART gaming state of a period in which the type of enemy character playing against the ally character is determined. As shown in FIG. 66, from the enemy determination ART, there is a possibility of transition to a battle ART and a bonus state. Specifically, in (G) enemy determination ART, when an enemy character is determined, the secondary control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. In addition, the determination method of the enemy character in enemy determination ART is mentioned later.

  In addition, the battle ART is an ART gaming state in a period in which the enemy character decided in the enemy determination ART and the ally character fight against each other. As shown in FIG. 66, from the battle ART, there is a possibility of transition to an enemy determination ART, a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and a bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) in the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and the (H2) enemy character wins. Then, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the general gaming state. In addition, the determination method of the victory or defeat of battle (H) in battle ART is mentioned later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state starting means, and the part related to the replay is internally won during the enemy determination ART and the battle ART, which is started based on the winning of the transition lottery. Notification of a mode of stop operation necessary to maintain the RT4 gaming state having a high probability of being determined as a winning combination (for example, the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the RT4 transition lip) is started.

[Correspondence between main side and sub side of winning combination]
FIG. 67 shows a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. On the sub side, the winning combinations on the main side are managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. In addition, with regard to "off", it may be referred to as "pure out" only during the RT4 gaming state. Further, the correspondence relationship between the main side and the sub side of the winning combination can be made different depending on the game state. In this regard, the correspondence shown in FIG. 67 shows the correspondence in the gaming state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG.

[Overview of Effects Performed by Liquid Crystal Display Device 11]
FIG. 68 shows an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. In FIG. 68, the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into two areas of the first display area 111 and the second display area 112 in order to simplify the description, but in the actual pachi slot 1 each area is mixed. It will be formed integrally.

  The first display area 111 is an area where main effects are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 68, a display example during battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 68, the ally character and the enemy character fight against each other, and by reducing their physical strength (HP) by each attack / defense, an effect of winning and losing is performed. .

  In the second display area 112, an apocalypse 113 that affects various types of lottery performed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side is displayed. The apocalypse 113 includes five areas 113A, 113B, 113C, 113D, and 113E in which effect balls to be described later are set. In the area 113A, effect balls that affect various lottery in the current game are set, in the area 113B, effect balls that affect various lottery in the next game are set, and in the area 113C, two game destinations are In the game, the effect balls that affect various lottery are set, in the area 113D, the effect balls that affect various lottery in the three-player game are set, and in the area 113E, the various lottery in four-game game The production ball that affects the is set. That is, in the apocalypse 113, effect balls that affect various lottery in five games including the current game are set. In the effect ball set in the apocalypse 113, the set area is updated as the game progresses. The apocalypse 113 is activated so that some effect balls (including blanks (empty)) are set, and the effect balls are not set when in non-operation.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may operate or may not be activated, and operates by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 113 is activated in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, in the regions 113A to 113E, as shown in FIG. The production ball of is set. The lottery balls 1 to 1 set in the apocalypse 113 in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state have an influence on the above-described transition lottery (A) (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to 1 set in the area 113A affect the above-described transition lottery (A) (D) in the current game.

  In addition, the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) is performed twice at the time of the reel rotation start and the time of the reel stop in one game. Among these, with respect to transition lottery (A) (D) performed at the time of reel rotation start (start), lottery balls 1 to 1 set in region 113A are selected as lottery results regardless of the internal winning combination. Have an impact on On the other hand, with respect to transition lottery (A) (D) performed at the time of reel stop, the combination of balls for lottery balls 1 to set ball set in area 113A is “bell winning” or more in combination of symbols displayed at the time of reel stop Only when there is an impact on the lottery results. In addition, "bell prize" is that the combination of the symbol at the time of pushing order correct in the pushing order bell is displayed, or the combination of the symbols according to the common bell is displayed, and "bell winning" or more The symbol combination may be displayed according to one of the "bell prize" or the rare character such as chan lip, strong cherry, weak cherry, fixed part, watermelon, or net out (see FIG. 67). It is.

  In the lottery balls 1 to the determination ball, the influence given to the transition lottery (A) (D) is different from each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the lottery ball 1 has a low probability of winning of CZ or higher (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a middle probability of winning of CZ or more, and the lottery ball 3 has The winning probability of CZ or higher is a high probability, and the lottery ball 4 has a winning of CZ or higher, and the winning ball has a winning of ART.

  Subsequently, in CZ, the apocalypse 113 always works. In CZ, as shown in FIG. 57, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, one of the effect balls of the development ball and the avoidance ball is set, or a blank (empty) state in which no effect balls are set. The development ball set in the apocalypse 113 in CZ, the avoidance ball, affects the transitional lottery (C) to the above described ART performed during CZ. More specifically, the development ball and the avoidance ball set in the area 113A affect the above-described transition to ART in the present game and the lottery (C).

  Specifically, in the case where the development ball is set in the area 113A, when the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) to ART is performed. And, when the stop operation is performed in this game, if the stop operation is the correct stop operation in the order of pressing determined for the winning order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) Becomes "invalid". On the other hand, if the stopping operation is the stopping operation of the incorrect answer in the pushing order defined for the winning order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes “maintain”. As described above, CZ is a full run CZ, and CZ ends when the transition lottery (C) performed in the middle stage before the full run is “maintained”. Therefore, in the game in which the development ball is set in the area 113A, the player desires that the pushing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (transition lottery (C) itself is not performed), and temporarily pushing order. If Bell is determined to be an internal winning combination, it is desired that the correct order is correct (transition lottery (C) becomes invalid).

  In the above description, that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is "maintained" means that in the game in which the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation of the incorrect answer is performed in the pushing order It is the same as displaying the combination of symbols displayed in the case (bell spilled eye). Therefore, the termination condition of CZ can be said that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is "maintained", and a bell spill is displayed in the game in which the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. It can also be said that.

  Further, in the above description, when the bell spill is displayed, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is set to “invalid”, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is set to “ineffective” when the pushing order of the pushing order is correct, the player will be disadvantaged if the transition lottery (C) has been won. become. In this respect, CZ can be continued without giving a disadvantage to the player by "maintaining" without making the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) "ineffective" when the pushing order of the pushing order bell is correct. Is preferred. In addition, when it decides to "maintain" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) at the pushing order correct of pushing order bell, the end condition of CZ should use the condition of incorrect answer order of pushing order bell pushing preferable. As a result, it is possible to "maintain" the lottery result of the migration lottery (C) while continuing the CZ. In addition, to "maintain" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) while continuing the CZ, for example, when winning the transition lottery (C), the rights (number of sets) of the ART were according to the lottery result It means giving number (one or more). Thus, by "maintaining" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) during the CZ, the transition lottery (first grant lottery) performed in the middle stage of the CZ and the transition lottery performed at the CZ completion (second) The rights (set number) of the ART granted in both of the rights and the lottery can be granted, and as a result, the ART for the rights can be executed after the end of the CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the right frequency management means and the advantageous state control means, and is applied in both the transition lottery performed in the middle stage of the CZ and the transition lottery performed in the CZ completion. While counting the number of additions of the rights of ART, the ART for the number of additions is executed after the end of CZ.

  On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are effect balls which do not perform the above-mentioned transition to the ART and the lottery (C) even if the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the player's point of view, in the game in which the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are set, it is possible to play the game with ease.

  Subsequently, in the enemy determination ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. In the enemy determination ART, as shown in FIG. 68, one of the effect balls of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball is set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. The boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 set in the apocalypse 113 in the enemy determination ART, and the ally balls affect the lottery of the hostile determination performed during the enemy determination ART. More specifically, the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 set in the area 113A, and the ally ball have an influence on the selection of the enemy determination in the current game.

  Specifically, when any of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A, if the pushing order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, the set is made. A boss corresponding to the type of boss ball being selected is determined as an opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 are enemy characters having different features, respectively, which will be described in detail later. On the other hand, when one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A, if a player other than pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined, and the enemy determination is made. ART will continue. In addition, when any of boss balls 1 to boss balls 8 is set in the area 113A, any of net removal, watermelon, weak cherries, strong cherries, or chan lip (a so-called rare role) is determined as an internal winning combination If so, the opponent is not determined, and stock lottery of ally balls is performed. In the situation where the stock lottery is won and the ally balls are stocked, the boss balls 1 to the boss ball 8 set in the apocalypse will be rewritten to the ally balls.

  Further, when an ally ball is set in the area 113A during the enemy determination ART, a lottery is performed to increase the strength (HP) of the ally character based on the internal winning combination. When winning this lottery, the strength of the ally character is increased, and the expectation of the ally character to win in the subsequent battle ART is increased.

  Subsequently, in battle ART, apocalypse 113 always operates. In the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 68, one of the effect balls of the ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball is set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. The ally balls, the enemy balls, and the awakening balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the battle ART affect the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the ally balls, the enemy balls, and the awakening balls set in the area 113A affect the battle in the current or subsequent game.

  Specifically, when an alligator ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if the pushing order bell or the common bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the character corresponding to the type of the set effect ball is Attack the opponent in the game. For example, when an ally ball is set, the ally character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the enemy character's strength (HP) decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the ally character, and as a result, the strength (HP) of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, when an allied ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A, it is determined that any of net loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chan lip (so-called rare role) is determined as an internal winning combination The ally character attacks the enemy character regardless of the type of effect ball set. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character is basically reduced more than when the pushing order bell is determined to be the internal winning combination.

  When the awakening ball is set in the area 113A, the ally character is determined to be an internal winning combination of push order bell, common bell, net misplacement, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chan lip. While attacking the enemy character, an alloy ball is stocked. Then, when the ally balls are stocked, the enemy balls set in the apocalypse are rewritten to the ally balls by the stocked amount. As a result, the situation in which the teammate character attacks is increased thereafter, and as a result, the degree of expectation for the teammate character to win in the battle ART increases.

[How to manage production balls]
Then, with reference to FIG. 69, the management method of the production | presentation ball in the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In pachislot 1, the sub control circuit 101 stores information on the rendering balls set in the apocalypse 113 in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 103. As described above, since the effect balls are set in the apocalypse 113 corresponding to the five areas 113A to 113E, the sub RAM 103 stores five or more effect balls. In this respect, in the present embodiment, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103, as shown in FIG.

  Among the six effect balls, the effect ball stored in the storage area "1" is set corresponding to the area 113A, and the effect ball stored in the storage area "2" is set corresponding to the area 113B. The effect ball stored in the storage area "3" is set corresponding to the area 113C, and the effect ball stored in the storage area "4" is set corresponding to the area 113D and stored in the storage area "5" The effect balls to be played are set corresponding to the area 113E, and the effect balls stored in the storage area "6" are not set for the current game but are set corresponding to the area 113E for the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the time of FIG. 69 (a) (now game), lottery balls 1, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, confirmed in storage areas “1” to “5” respectively. Balls are stored, and as a result, lottery balls 1, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, and determination balls are set in areas 113A to 113E of apocalypse 113, respectively. On the other hand, although the lottery balls 3 are stored in the storage area “6”, the lottery balls stored in the storage area “6” are not set in the apocalypse 113 at the time of FIG. 69 (a).

  Then, when it becomes the next game, the effect balls stored in the storage area are updated, and the effect balls set in the areas 113A to 113E slide one by one. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game have storage areas "2" to "6" at the time (previous game) of FIG. 69 (a). The effect balls stored in “are stored in the storage area“ 6 ”of the next game, and a new effect ball is stored by lottery. As a result, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, the determination balls, and the effect balls 2 set in the storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game are set. It will be done.

  The effect balls stored in the respective storage areas are set in the respective areas by operating the apocalypse 113 (that is, displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Here, as described above, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, since the apocalypse 113 may or may not be activated, it is stored in the storage area in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. In some cases, a rendering ball is not set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. On the other hand, in CZ and ART, since the apocalypse 113 always operates, the rendering balls stored in the storage area are always set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 constitutes effect information storage means, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, storage areas “1” to “6” corresponding to the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. I memorize the effect ball. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes display means, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, part of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (for example, storage areas “1” to “5”) Are displayed in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. Further, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes effect information registration means, first effect information registration means, and second effect information registration means, and the respective gaming states (normal gaming state, high probability gaming state, CZ, ART gaming state) The game balls to be registered for the game for 6 games (a number of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead) are lottery and the game balls (lottery balls 1 to 4, determined balls) determined by the lottery , Boss balls 1 to 8, enemy balls, ally balls, etc.) are registered in the sub RAM 103 as effect information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse 113 are different between the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART. Therefore, the sub RAM 103 may be provided with a storage area corresponding to each state. In CZ, enemy determination ART, and battle ART, initial lottery of effect balls is performed at the start of each state, and all effect balls stored in sub RAM 103 are cleared at the end of each state. Therefore, for the CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART, a common storage area may be used because the timings of using the storage areas do not overlap.

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are maintained regardless of whether the apocalypse 113 is activated / deactivated. That is, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 immediately before the apocalypse 113 becomes inoperative is maintained while the apocalypse 113 is inoperative, and is maintained in the sub RAM 103 when the apocalypse 113 is activated next time. A directing ball is set in each area of the apocalypse 113. The storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is basically maintained during the game but is cleared at a predetermined timing. The timing for clearing the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described later.

[ART and CZ lottery in normal gaming state and high probability gaming state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 70 to FIG. 87, the details of the transition lottery (A) (D) to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram of the transition lottery (A) (D) performed during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, and FIGS. 71 to 87 are referred to during the transition lottery (A) (D). Various data tables. The various data tables are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of Transitional Sorting (A) (D)>
70, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the control of main control circuit 91. . In the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the transition lottery (A) (D) of ART and CZ at the start is performed. In this transitional lottery at the start (A) (D), basically, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the gaming state, and the higher probability gaming state is the winning of ART or CZ than the normal gaming state. The probability is high. In addition, in the transition lottery at the start (A) (D), as will be described later, not only the gaming state but also the internal winning combination and the effect ball (lottery ball 1 to finalized ball) set in the area 113A Or the winning probability of CZ is different.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery of whether to operate the apocalypse is performed. The apocalypse lottery has different winning probabilities depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation includes low mode, high mode and concentrated mode (each in the state of short, middle, and long, respectively), and it is low for winning the apocalypse in the concentrated mode. In mode and high mode do not win apocalypse activation. In the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse is activated when the mode can be promoted to the concentrated mode.

  Thereafter, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the transition lottery (A) (D) of ART and CZ at the time of the reel stop is performed according to the presence or absence of the operation of the apocalypse. Specifically, when the apocalypse is operating, to ART and CZ based on the combination of the effect ball (lottery ball 1 to fixed ball) set in the area 113A and the symbols of "bell prize" or more. Perform the migration lottery (A) (D). The transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of the reel stop differs in the winning probability of ART or CZ depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A.

  On the other hand, when the apocalypse is not in operation, the promotion lottery of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed. When the apocalypse is not in operation, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are not set to the apocalypse (in other words, they are not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, this promotion lottery will be performed on hidden information that does not appear in the table. Although the details will be described later, since the rotating role product 200 is driven during the period in which the promotion lottery is performed, the player can grasp that the promotion lottery is being performed.

<Various data tables to be referred to in migration lottery (A) (D)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 70 to FIG. 87, transition lottery to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be specifically described.

<Start ART lottery table>
FIGS. 70 to 73 are diagrams showing start-time ART lottery tables to be referred to in transition random determination (A) and (D) at the start in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. At the time of start, the ART lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the lottery result for each of the current gaming state, the effect balls set in the area 113A, and the internal winning combination.

  In this embodiment, on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side, the effect random number values extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 32767” are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value according to each lottery result, A lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called "worried" has occurred).

  Referring to the start-art ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, during the normal gaming state, the probability of winning CZ or ART varies depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A, and the internal winning combination is also made. It can be seen that the probability of winning CZ or ART varies accordingly. Further, comparing the start ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 with the start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high probability gaming state, it wins ART with a higher probability than the normal gaming state, and In the high probability gaming state, although there is a probability of winning ART in all the roles, it can be seen that in the normal gaming state, only some of the roles are winning ART. In the case of a normal gaming state, when a part of players is determined to be an internal winning combination, it is synonymous with the fact that only a part of players win an ART, a part of players win a transition to ART. Transition to the start at the start of the lottery (A), the high probability gaming state is to perform the transition to the start of the transition (A) when a plurality of combinations including some of these roles are determined as internal winning combination become. Similarly, referring to the start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, it can be seen that in the high probability gaming state, although CZ is not won, the probability of winning ART is high.

<Mode transition lottery table>
FIGS. 74 to 78 are mode transition lottery tables to be referred to in transition lottery of winning mode of apocalypse operation in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The mode transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the transition destination winning mode, whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and for each internal winning combination. Whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating is determined by the apocalypse flag, and when the apocalypse flag is "0", it means that the apocalypse is not in operation, and when the apocalypse flag is "1", the apocalypse is activated. It means being inside.

  As described above, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include a low mode, a high mode and a concentrated mode, and each mode is provided with states such as short, middle and long. The low mode, the high mode and the concentration mode are winning modes that have different winning expectations for the apocalypse lottery whether or not to operate the apocalypse as described above. In addition, short, middle and long are states which define whether it is easy to shift to a more advantageous winning mode or to a more unfavorable winning mode. Specifically, a short is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode, and a state in which a short is more likely to shift to a more disadvantageous winning mode, and the middle is more difficult to shift to a more advantageous win mode. The state and the condition that makes it easier to shift to the more disadvantageous winning mode, and the long is the condition that makes it easier to shift to the more advantageous winning mode and the condition that makes it harder to shift to the more disadvantageous winning mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, in the case of the apocalypse non-operation (the apocalypse flag 0), the winning mode basically rises in the order of the low mode, the high mode and the concentration mode, and once rises to the concentration mode And does not go down to low mode and high mode until the apocalypse is activated.

<Apocalypse activated lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an apocalypse activated lottery table to be referred to in the apocalypse lottery in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The apocalypse activation lottery table defines, for each apocalypse activation mode, whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating, and for each internal winning combination, information on the lottery value regarding the operation of the apocalypse. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the game of the guaranteed number of additions and subtractions as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the guarantee number is added by the number corresponding to the winning of “Apocalypse in operation _ Security 1 addition” to “Apocalypse in operation _ Security 5 addition”, “Apocalypse in operation _ Security The number of guarantees is decremented by one when the subtraction is won. Then, when the number of guarantees becomes 0 as a result of the addition / subtraction, the operation of the apocalypse ends (the apocalypse flag changes from 1 to 0). If the number of guarantees is one or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, and the apocalypse is activated.

  Also, in the apocalypse activated lottery table, “no apocalypse activated” means that the apocalypse lottery is not won, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 0. Similarly, “Apocalypse active_maintain” means to maintain the operation of the apocalypse without adding or subtracting the guarantee count, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 1.

  Referring to the apocalypse activation lottery table of FIGS. 79 (A) and (B), when the apocalypse is not currently operating, the activation of the apocalypse may start only when the winning mode is the centralized mode. I understand. Therefore, the pachislot 1 may have an effect that suggests the current winning mode. For example, moving the rotating object 200 can indicate the current winning mode. Specifically, the probability of moving the rotating object 200 is made different according to the winning mode, for example, in a situation where the user is staying in the concentration mode, the probability of moving the rotating object 200 is increased, and the high mode or the low mode is selected. In the situation in which the user is staying, an aspect may be considered in which the probability of moving the rotating object 200 is lowered. Similarly, in the apocalypse lottery, an effect may be given that indicates the degree of expectation that the apocalypse will be activated (the number of guarantees is added). In particular, the presentation of the suggestion of the degree of expectation may be performed using something different from that of the rotating character 200. Specifically, an image corresponding to the latent image 402 may be displayed on the panel device 400 in a color according to the degree of expectation.

<Apocalypse MAP lottery table>
FIGS. 80 and 81 show an apocalypse MAP lottery table for lottery an apocalypse MAP for determining an effect ball to be set in an active apocalypse in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the larger the MAP number is, the more advantageous the player is. This point is not limited to the apocalypse MAP, and the same applies to other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 80 is a table to be referred to when the apocalypse is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). Further, the apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 81 is a table to be referred to when the MAP data defined for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

  The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines, for each current apocalypse MAP, information on a lottery value for the migration destination apocalypse MAP. At the initial stage of power on, “MAP0” is set as the apocalypse MAP.

<MAP data correspondence table>
In the apocalypse MAP, MAP data for defining a rendering ball to be set in the active apocalypse is defined. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 82, in the apocalypse MAP1, MAP data "1" is defined in the first game, and MAP data "0" is defined in the second game. When MAP data “0” is defined, a new apocalypse MAP is to be extracted with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG.

<Apocalypse operation production ball lottery table>
FIG. 83 shows an apocalypse activation-time effect ball lottery table for determining an effect ball to be set to an apocalypse in operation in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The apocalypse operation time production ball lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the production ball set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 83, an effect ball more advantageous to the player is set as the MAP data is larger. In FIG. 83, the finalized ball is not randomly selected. Although this point and explanation are omitted, for example, it is possible to upgrade from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 4 to the finalization ball by performing lottery to promote the production balls set at the time of winning the role of rare, etc. It is also good.

  Further, in FIG. 83, the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is defined also for the MAP data “0”. As described above, in the case of the MAP data "0", a new apocalypse MAP is extracted. Here, either of the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP and the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” may be prioritized. In this respect, in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery of the directing ball is not performed even once in the lottery apocalypse MAP, the lottery of the directing ball based on the MAP data “0” has priority, and the lottery apocalypse In the case where lottery of directing balls is performed even once in MAP, priority is given to lottery of a new apocalypse MAP. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “0”, since all the MAP data in the 5 games are “0” (see FIG. 82), lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” is performed once, and then new Sort the apocalypse MAP. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “1”, since the MAP data of the first game is “1” and the MAP data of the second game is “0” (see FIG. 82), an effect based on the MAP data “0” A new apocalypse MAP is lottery after lottery of a production ball based on MAP data “1” without lottery of balls.

  This point also applies to other MAPs described later. Specifically, MAP data “0” performs lottery based on MAP data “0” only in the first game, and in the case of second game transition, without performing lottery based on MAP data “0”. , Lottery a new MAP. When such control is performed, the lottery based on the MAP data "0" is not performed in the MAP whose MAP number is "1" or more.

<Flow of set of directing balls to apocalypse>
Here, the flow at the time of setting the effect ball to the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1 in order to win the apocalypse lottery, the apocalypse is activated. At the same time as the operation of the apocalypse, the sub control circuit 101 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 to the apocalypse. As mentioned above, the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is basically maintained during the game, so when the apocalypse is activated, the maintained effect balls are set to the apocalypse become. On the other hand, storage areas according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state are also changed at the time of setting change or opening the next day (when the predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned off until the power is turned on again) It is cleared at a predetermined timing such as time). Then, when the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is cleared, the effect balls are initially set (re-lottery) in the storage area. In the following, the flow of initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described.

  In the initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, first, the apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. In this initialization, an apocalypse MAP “0”, which is an initial apocalypse MAP, is initially set. In the apocalypse MAP "0", as shown in FIG. 82, "0" is defined as MAP data of the first game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly selects the first effect ball based on the MAP data “0” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse operation effect ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the first effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “0”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub control circuit 101 performs lottery of a new apocalypse MAP without performing lottery of effect balls. Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referenced at the time of MAP data “0” shown in FIG. 81, the migration-destination apocalypse MAP is extracted from the current apocalypse MAP “0”. In the example shown in FIG. 81, the apocalypse MAP “1” is to be extracted as the migration destination apocalypse MAP. In the apocalypse MAP "1", as shown in FIG. 82, "1" is defined as MAP data of the first game, and "0" is defined as MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly selects the second effect ball based on the MAP data "1" of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse operation effect ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 2” is determined as the second effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “1”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub control circuit 101 performs lottery of a new apocalypse MAP without performing lottery of effect balls. Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referenced at the time of MAP data “0” shown in FIG. 81, the migration-destination apocalypse MAP is sorted out from the current apocalypse MAP “1”. Referring to FIG. 81, for example, apocalypse MAP “2” is randomly selected as the migration-destination apocalypse MAP. In the apocalypse MAP "2", as shown in FIG. 70, "1" is defined as MAP data of the first game, and "0" is defined as MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly selects the third effect ball based on the MAP data "1" of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse operation effect ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 3” is determined as the third effect ball.

  Similarly, when six effect balls are repeatedly determined, the sub control circuit 101 ends the lottery of the effect balls, and stores the determined effect balls in the sub RAM 103 in order. In addition, although the order which determines presentation balls is arbitrary, the sub control circuit 101 determines the presentation balls in the order according to each area | region of the apocalypse 113, for example. That is, the sub control circuit 101 determines in order from the effect ball set in the area 113A of the apocalypse 113.

<Promotion of promotion ball>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 84, a method of promoting the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of a promotion method of effect balls used during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, a predetermined number of effect balls are stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 even if the apocalypse is in a non-operational state. Although the effect ball memorized is not set (displayed) in the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (a) in the situation where the apocalypse is inoperative, when the apocalypse operates, it corresponds to the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (b) It is set (displayed) in the area.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the promotion lottery of the effect balls (that is, the effect balls being non-displayed) stored in the sub RAM 103 in the non-operation state of the apocalypse is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the lottery ball 1 stored in the storage area “1” in FIG. 84 (a) is promoted to the lottery ball 3 as shown in FIG. 84 (c) as a result of the promoted lottery. . After that, when the apocalypse is activated, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the corresponding area of the apocalypse. Comparing FIGS. 84 (b) and 84 (d), as a result of the promoted lottery, it is understood that the effect ball set in the area 113 A is promoted from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 3.

  Such a promotion lottery will be performed when the rotating object 200 moves in a situation where the apocalypse is inoperative. Specifically, in the pachislot 1, when the cover member 198 corresponding to the eyelid of the rotating role thing 200 which is the feature of the eyeball is released and the eyeball main body 203 corresponding to the eyeball becomes visible from the player The promotion lottery of the production balls will be performed. Therefore, when the eyeball main body 203 appears during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the elevation main body of the eyeball main body 203 appears since the promotion lottery of the effect ball affecting the ART lottery is performed. The game will be played in the hope that it will be promoted to a more advantageous performance ball for a period.

<Mobile item movable lottery table>
FIG. 85 is a bonus product movable lottery table for lottery whether or not to perform promotion lottery of non-displayed production balls during non-operation of the apocalypse in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The movable item lottery table defines the information of the lottery value related to the movement of the rotary object 200 for each internal winning combination. In the pachislot 1, when the guarantee of the movement of the item becomes 1 or more as a result of the lottery using the movable item lottery table, the role of the rotating object 200 for moving the rotating object 200 (the cover member 198 is opened) A movement request is issued to the control task (see FIG. 132 described later). In addition, since the elevation lottery of the non-displayed effect ball is performed while the rotary product 200 is movable as described above, the bonus movable lottery table is shifted to a period in which the promotion lottery is performed. It can be said that this is a table for performing a lottery on whether or not to.

  As shown in FIG. 85, basically, the number of guaranteed goods movable is added by determining the role of rare as an internal winning combination, and a role other than the role of rare is determined as an internal winning combination Is subtracted or maintained. After the guaranteed number of bonus items movable becomes 1 or more and the rotary bonus item 200 is moved, when the guaranteed number of bonus items movable becomes 0, the flexibility of the rotary bonus item 200 ends and the cover member 198 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the movable item lottery means, and randomly determines whether or not to perform promotion lottery using the movable item lottery table, and guarantees the movable item by the lottery result. When the number becomes one or more, the movement request of the rotating object 200 is made.

<Production ball promotion lottery table>
Subsequently, in FIG. 86, it is randomly determined whether or not to promote the non-displayed effect ball in a state where the rotary product 200 is movable (that is, when the guaranteed number of product movement is 1 or more). It is a production ball promotion lottery table for. The presentation ball promotion lottery table defines information of lottery values regarding the number of promotion balls for each internal winning combination. The rendering balls according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state are provided in the order of the lottery ball 1, the lottery ball 2, the lottery ball 3, the lottery ball 4, and the determination ball according to the degree of expectation of ART or CZ winning. The number of promotion prescribed in the staging ball promotion lottery table indicates the number of stages for promoting these staging balls to staging balls with a higher degree of expectation. For example, "one-step promotion" means promoting from lottery ball 1 to drawing ball 2, promoting from lottery ball 2 to drawing ball 3, etc. Also, "two-step promotion" means selection from ball 1 to It means promoting to the lottery ball 3, promoting to the lottery ball 4 from the lottery ball 2, and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a promotion lottery means, and in a state where the rotary product 200 is movable, whether or not to promote the non-displayed production ball using the production ball promotion lottery table Let's lottery.

  As described above, in the sub RAM 103, six effect balls are stored. Here, the effect ball to be promoted is optional when it is decided to promote the effect ball in the promotion lottery. For example, all six effect balls may be promoted at the same time according to the result of the promoted lottery, or only one or more effect balls to be promoted may be promoted according to the result of the promoted lottery. Good. In this case, the method of determining one or more effect balls to be promoted is also arbitrary.

  For example, it is conceivable to determine six effect balls in order as the effect balls to be promoted. Specifically, the effect ball stored in the storage area "1" of the sub RAM 103 is first determined as the effect ball to be promoted, and then the promotion ball stored in the storage area "2" is to be promoted Determined as a production ball. In this case, the timing of updating the promotion target balls is also arbitrary. For example, in a case where a predetermined number of games have been completed or a promotion lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (only “no promotion” is specified), a promotion lottery may be performed on a production ball targeted for completion or promotion of a predetermined number of games. In addition, it does not matter if promotion lottery is done) it is good also as updating the production ball of the promotion object when it is done, furthermore, when the production ball of the promotion object can be promoted even at one stage, the production ball of the promotion object is It may be updated, or the promotion object may be updated if the promotion object to be promoted can be promoted to a predetermined effect ball (for example, lottery ball 4). In addition, if it is decided to promote the number of stages as a result of the promotion lottery, it is also possible to promote only the effect balls that were to be promoted in this game to a plurality of stages, and further, the effect balls are one stage A plurality of stage balls may be promoted one stage at a time, such as one stage stage of the target ball for the next promotion, while the stage ball is promoted, and the stage ball to be promoted is promoted two stages, It is also possible to promote a plurality of effect balls while weighting according to whether or not the next promotion target effect ball is to be promoted, such as one stage.

  Further, for example, it is also conceivable to determine one or a plurality of effect balls determined by lottery among the six effect balls as effect balls to be promoted. In addition, it is good also as performing predetermined weighting for the lottery for determining the production | presentation ball of promotion object. The weighting method is arbitrary, but, for example, the effect ball with lower expectation can be made more easily lottery as the effect ball to be promoted, and the effect ball whose number of times determined as the effect ball to be promoted is less It can be made easy to be lottery as a promotion object of promotion object. Also in this case, the promotion target production balls may be updated at any timing, and when it is determined to promote the number of stages, the production balls other than the promotion target production balls are also It may be promoted.

<Control of the revolving role 200 at the time of promotion>
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the rotary part 200 may be controlled based on the result of the promoted lottery. As described above, the rotating product 200 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, and illuminates the eyeball main body 203 from the back side. At the time of the promotion lottery, the eyeball main body 203 appears due to the movement of the rotating object 200, so the pachislot 1 controls the LED according to the result of the promotion lottery and various colors of the eyeball main body 203 visible to the player By emitting light at step S2, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the promotion lottery in a speculable manner. For example, a mode may be considered in which the result of the promoted lottery is notified by controlling the LED and emitting the eyeball main body 203 in various colors such as white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. In addition, since light emission is controlled by the below-mentioned lamp control task, as for several LED provided in the rotating product 200, the light emission of the eyeball main body 203, for example It is executed by requesting the lamp control task for a pattern.

  In the pachislot 1, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103, but the relationship between the light emission color of the LED and the effect balls can be set arbitrarily. For example, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on the total number of promoted numbers of six effect balls. As an example, when the total number of promotion balls of six pieces is “1” or less, the LED emits light “white”, and when the total number is “3” or less, the LED emits “blue”, When the total number is "5" or less, the LED emits "yellow".

  In addition, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on any one or more of the six effect balls after promotion. Specifically, as a result of the promotion lottery, based on the type of the production ball having the highest degree of expectation among the six production balls, for example, when the production ball having the highest degree of expectation is the drawing ball 1, “LED” "White" emits light, LED emits "blue" when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 2, and "yellow" LED when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 3 It emits light.

  According to the latter method, any one or more of the six production balls are promoted to a high expectation ball, and the other production balls remain as the low expectation ball. Also, the LED emits light with a high expected color such as red and rainbow, and as a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a high expected color. On the other hand, if the six production balls are promoted throughout as a whole and all of the six production balls have relatively low expectation, the LED has a low expectation color such as blue or yellow. As a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a low expected degree.

  On the other hand, according to the former method, when the total number of the upgraded number of six directing balls is small, the LED is expected even if any of the six directing balls is promoted to a highly expected directing ball. As a result, the eyepiece main body 203 emits light with a low expected degree. On the other hand, if the total number of promoted balls for the six directing balls is large, even if all of the six directing balls are still the directing balls with a relatively low degree of expectation, the LED has a high expectation color As a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light in a color with a high degree of expectation.

  In addition, the light emission of the LED may be controlled by combining the former method and the latter method. Specifically, only by increasing the total number of the six promoted balls to a total number, or by promoting any one or more of the six directed balls to a highly expected directed ball, the LED is expected The LED does not emit light in high color, and any one or more of the individual production balls are promoted to a highly expected production ball, and the total number of promoted balls for the six production balls is large, the LED is expected degree The light may be emitted in a high color.

  Moreover, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, two lotterys of the movable lottery of the rotary combination 200 and the promoted lottery of the presentation balls are performed separately, but the movable lottery of the rotary combination 200 is not performed, but the staging is performed. It may be possible to carry out only the ball elevation lottery. Specifically, when it is determined to promote the effect ball as a result of the promotion lottery of the effect ball, the rotary role object 200 may be moved and the eyeball main body 203 may be displayed on the surface.

  By separately performing the two lotterys of the movable lottery of the rotating character 200 and the promoted lottery of the presentation balls as in the present embodiment, it is possible to create a game period in which the staging balls are promoted. From the player's point of view, since there is a chance period to promote the effect balls during this game period, the interest during the period in which the main body 203 of the eyeball can be viewed is improved.

  On the other hand, even in such a chance period, in the case of not winning the promotion lottery performed individually, the balls are not promoted, so in the method of performing two lotterys separately as in this embodiment, Even if the eyeball main body 203 becomes visible, the effect ball may not be promoted. In this respect, in the method in which only the promotion lottery of the effect balls is performed and the rotating role product 200 is movable when it is decided to promote the effect balls, the effect balls are necessarily promoted when the eyeball main body 203 becomes visible. As a result, the player can have expectations for the subsequent game.

<ART lottery table at reel stop>
FIG. 87 is a view showing a reel stop time ART lottery table referred to in transition lottery (A) (D) when the reel is stopped in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The reel stopping time ART lottery table defines information of lottery values for the lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 113A. Here, as described above, in the transition lottery (A) and (D) when the reel is stopped, the effect ball set in the area 113A is such that the combination of symbols displayed when the reel is stopped is "bell winning" or more As long as it affects the lottery results. Therefore, the ART lottery table at the reel stop shown in FIG. 87 is a table referred to only when the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of the reel stop is “bell prize winning” or more when the effect ball is set in the area 113A. is there.

  Referring to the ART lottery table at the time of reel stop shown in FIG. 87, the probability of winning in CZ or ART differs depending on the effect ball set in area 113A, and in particular, in the case of lottery ball 4 and finalized ball, CZ or ART is It turns out that you will win successfully.

[Game in High Probability Game State]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the flow of games other than the transition lottery (D) in the high probability gaming state will be described. As described above, the high probability gaming state corresponds to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and the main side transitions from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The probability gaming state also ends, and it shifts to the normal gaming state. As described above, the case in which the main side shifts from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is a case where the pushing order bell or pushing order lip is incorrect. Therefore, the high probability gaming state ends at the timing when the sub side recognizes that the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is displayed on the pushing order bell or pushing order lip. Here, if the high probability gaming state is ended immediately and the normal gaming state is entered despite the transition from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state, the interest will be lost. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, the pushing order bell or pushing order lip is informed of the pushing order of the correct answer only for a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram of a flow of gaming in the high probability gaming state, and FIG. 89 is a data table referred to in the high probability gaming state. The data table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Summary of flow of game in high probability game state>
Referring to FIG. 88, when a combination of symbols relating to the RT4 transition ripple is displayed during ART transition lottery in the normal gaming state and not winning, transition to RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is made on the main side. At this point, the sub-side gaming state is the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the control of the main control circuit 91. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the internal winning combination is determined, the lottery of the avoidance points is performed based on the determined internal winning combination. When an avoidance point is obtained in this lottery, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state for the first time. The shift lottery (B) to the high probability gaming state described above in FIG. 66 corresponds to the lottery of the avoidance points.

  In the high probability gaming state, a situation in which the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side is avoided based on the acquired avoidance points. Specifically, in the high probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the control of the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 determines, based on the internal winning combination, whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is a push order bell or a push order lip, the sub control circuit 101 determines that there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won.

  When there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, the secondary control circuit 101 corrects the pushing order bell or pushing order lip determined as the internal winning combination only when the avoidance point remains. Informing the order of pushing. By receiving this notification, the player can perform the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer, and the high probability gaming state ends (that is, it shifts to the RT1 gaming state where the bonus is not won). Can be avoided. In the case where there is no avoidance point, the player himself selects the pressing order that is correct.

Thereafter, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the transition of the gaming state is performed on the main side based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, when a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, it shifts to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state, and otherwise, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-earning state is maintained. . On the sub side, when the gaming state on the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the sub control circuit 101 ends the high probability gaming state and starts the normal gaming state from the next game. On the other hand, when the main-side gaming state maintains the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the sub control circuit 101 maintains the high probability gaming state, and sets the next game to the high probability gaming state.
The above flow is the flow of the game in the high probability game state.

<Avoidance point lottery table>
FIG. 89 shows an avoidance point lottery table which is referred to in a normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). The avoidance point lottery table defines the number of replays determined as an internal winning combination during the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), and information of lottery values for avoidance points to be added for each internal winning combination in the current game . As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referred to based on the number of times that replay is determined to be an internal winning combination. In FIG. 89, although the number of times that replay is determined as an internal winning combination is different between “0 times” and “one or more times”, the number of times that the tables are different is not limited to this. .

  Referring to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 89, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the replay is determined as an internal winning combination one or more times, the probability that an avoidance point is awarded increases, and in particular, the replay is 1 In Replays determined as internal winning combinations after being determined by internal winning combinations more than times, avoidance points are more likely to be awarded. As described above, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a high probability that the role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination, and therefore, when the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) continues several games, avoidance points are awarded. It will be

[Game in CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 95, the flow of the game in CZ will be described. FIG. 90 is a schematic view of the flow of gaming in the CZ, and FIGS. 91 to 95 are data tables referred to in the CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 91 to 95 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of the flow of games in CZ>
As described above, when winning CZ in the transition lottery (A) (D) in the normal gaming state or the high probability gaming state, the gaming state shifts to CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit constitutes a lottery state start means, and when the player wins CZ in the transition lottery, shifts the gaming state to CZ. As shown in FIG. 90, in the first game after transition to CZ, when rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation, CZ_MAP is subjected to lottery. The CZ is a complete run type chance zone that continues for up to 30 games, while the transition to ART performed midway is terminated when the lottery (C) is "maintained". The transition to ART performed in the middle of CZ is such that the winning probability of ART increases as CZ continues. The CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the ART winning probability increases in the transition to ART performed in the middle of the CZ.

  When CZ_MAP is lottery in the first game after CZ transition, lottery of invalid points is subsequently performed. The lottery of invalid points includes lottery of an initial value performed in the first game after transition to CZ, and addition lottery performed on each game in CZ. The invalid point is information that defines the number of times that the transition lottery to the ART performed in the middle of CZ is made “invalid”.

  Then, the lottery of the production balls set in the apocalypse is performed. Thereafter, in a game other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not a development ball is set in the current game, that is, whether or not a development ball is set in the area 113A. If the development ball is set in the game this time, there is a possibility that the transition lottery to the ART in the middle of CZ may be performed (C), and basically, if the development ball is not set, this is basically the case. Migration lottery (C) is not performed. Specifically, when the development ball is set, the invalidation point is 0, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery (C) to ART in the middle of CZ is performed. In addition, the transition lottery in CZ differs in winning probability of ART according to CZ mode, and always wins ART when it is CZ mode 1 or more. The above-mentioned CZ_MAP is a MAP that sets the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 92).

  Here, if the development ball is set in the current game and the invalidation point is 1 or more, or if the avoidance ball is set in the current game, an effect indicating the current CZ mode should be performed. It may be Specifically, since CZ_MAP is set to the number of games in which CZ mode goes from 0 to 1, the current CZ mode is 1 and CZ mode goes from 0 to 1 in a few more games. It can be specified from CZ_MAP if it goes up. The sub control circuit 101 is compared to the other cases when the current CZ mode is 1 or when the CZ mode goes from 0 to 1 in a game within a few times (for example, a couple of times) By performing effects in different modes, it is possible to perform effects that suggest the current CZ mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, in the game of the 30th game of CZ, transition lottery to ART is performed. In this case, a transition to ART based on CZ mode 2 is always carried out and the lottery (C) is performed, and the ART will be won if the chance zone is completed. And when CZ is completely run as mentioned above, it will shift to more advantageous ART gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes advantageous state lottery means, and performs transition lottery (C) to ART when CZ is completed (30 games).

  During CZ, if the transition to ART accompanying the development ball is performed at the start, the following process is performed. Specifically, after that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, it is determined whether or not the combination of displayed symbols is "bell prize winning" or more, that is, correct order of pushing bells Determine if you Then, if the correct order of push order bell is made, the result of the lottery of the transition lottery to the ART with the development ball (C) is invalidated regardless of whether or not the ART is won, and the CZ continues. become. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect answers in the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to ART accompanying the development ball is maintained, and thereafter, the gaming state is shifted according to the lottery result. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes gaming state control means, performs transitional lottery (C) of ART during CZ, and transitions the gaming state to the ART gaming state according to the lottery result.

  Thus, in CZ, as CZ continues, the probability of winning a transition to ART (lottery) (C) increases, and additionally, if CZ is completed, then transition to ART (lot) (C) must always be won, and The longer the CZ lasts, the more advantageous the player is in order to transition to an advantageous ART gaming state. Therefore, the player plays a game so that the CZ continues. Here, since the termination condition of the CZ is that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to ART is maintained, the player is not allowed to set the development ball in the apocalypse, and the development ball is made in the apocalypse In the set game, if the pushing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination, and if the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set in the apocalypse, The game will be played in order to be correct in pushing order.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 91 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referred to in the first game after CZ transition. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines information of lottery values for types of CZ_MAP. When transitioning to CZ, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and extracts CZ_MAP used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 92 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP extracted by the CZ_MAP extraction table. For each CZ_MAP, a CZ mode is set for each number of continued games in CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the winning probability of ART in the transition to ART in CZ as described above, and the larger the CZ mode value is, the higher the winning probability of ART is set. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, each of CZ_MAPs is set so that the CZ mode is increased each time the number of continuing games in CZ is increased, and is not decreased once the CZ mode is increased. That is, each CZ_MAP is set such that the number of games to be moved from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAPs, when the number of continuing games is 30, the CZ mode is set to be 2.

  In the present embodiment, only three types of CZ modes 0, 1 and 2 are provided as the CZ mode. However, according to the present invention, the CZ mode goes up each time the number of continued games in CZ increases, and once CZ. It is sufficient if the mode is set so as not to go down, and the types of CZ modes are not limited to three.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 93 is an invalid point lottery table. The invalidation point lottery table is to invert the transition to ART performed when the push order is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball in CZ is set, and infers the invalidation points to invalidate the lottery. Used for When the invalidation point is one or more, the transition lottery to ART performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set is invalidated. In addition, when an invalidation point is 1 or more, it is good also as invalidating after performing a transition lottery (C) once, and it is good also as not performing a transition lottery (C) from the first.

  As described above, the lottery of invalid points includes the lottery of the initial value performed in the first game after the CZ transition, and the lottery of the extra carried out every CZ during the CZ. FIG. 93A is an ineffective point lottery table used for lottery of initial values, and defines information of lottery values for ineffective points determined as initial values. Further, (B) and (C) in FIG. 93 are invalidity point lottery tables used for the extra lottery, and it is a lottery for invalidity points to be added for each type of effect ball and internal winning combination set in the current game. Define value information.

<Effect ball lottery table>
FIG. 94 shows an effect ball lottery table used when lottery effect balls set in an apocalypse during CZ. It defines the information of the lottery value for the effect ball set for each final effect ball in the set. The final effect ball in the set is, for example, a effect ball set in the area 113E farthest from the current game. Referring to FIG. 94, when the final presentation ball in the set is a development ball, the development ball is not randomly selected. That is, during CZ, two development balls are not set consecutively in the apocalypse areas 113A to 113E. On the other hand, when the final effect ball in the set is the other (blank or avoidance ball), the development ball is randomly selected at a predetermined probability.

  In CZ, either a development ball or an avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse, but as shown in the production ball lottery table, in the production ball lottery, only the development ball or blank (empty) is lottery, Avoidance ball is not lottery. Here, the avoidance ball is set to the apocalypse by rewriting the set development ball when the invalidation point is 1 or more and the development ball is set in the apocalypse. In addition, when an ineffective point is one or more, the timing which rewrites a development ball into an avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, of the areas 113A to 113E, the development ball may not be rewritten to the avoidance ball until reaching the area 113B, and of course, the development ball may be rewritten to the avoidance ball at the time of the area 113E. Alternatively, the end of CZ may be avoided by maintaining the development ball even at the time of the area 113A and disabling the transition lottery (C) itself.

<CZ ART ART lottery table>
FIG. 95 is a ART lottery table in CZ referred to in transition lottery to ART in CZ. The ART lottery table in CZ defines the information of the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) for each presence or absence of winning in CZ mode and BB. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ, it is understood that when BB is not won, the probability of winning ART is low when CZ mode is 0, and always won when CZ mode is 1 or more. In the CZ mode, if the winning probability of ART in the transitional lottery (C) or the advantage of ART at ART winning is larger, the larger the value, the more advantageous it is for the player, the more advantageous it is for the player. There is no need to set it up.

[Game in BB]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 101, the flow of the game in the bonus state (also referred to as “in BB”) will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side during BB and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. FIG. 97 is a schematic view of the flow of gaming during the BB, and FIGS. 98 to 101 are data tables referred to during the BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Correspondence between main side and sub side of winning combination>
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side during BB and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. is there. On the sub side, the winning combinations on the main side are managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. The correspondence relationships other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 96 are the same as in FIG.

<Overview of the flow of games in BB>
As shown in FIG. 97, the game during BB is played triggered by the operation of BB. When the BB operation is performed, the BB mode is set to 0. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the winning probability of the ART in the transition lottery to the ART performed during the BB. The pachislot 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as the BB mode, and the winning probability of ART increases as the value of the BB mode increases.

  Subsequently, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started with the start operation during the BB, a transition lottery (F) to ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. This start transitional lottery (F) wins the ART when the sub-side abbreviation “7 allies rep” is determined as the internal winning combination regardless of the above-mentioned BB mode. I won't win ART.

  Subsequently, based on the internal winning combination in BB, BB mode mode up lottery is performed. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination which has the possibility of mode up for each current BB mode is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the Pachislot machine 1, as the BB mode goes up, the types of winning combinations that may be mode up are set to be smaller.

  Thereafter, when medals are paid out in response to the stop operation, it is determined whether or not to end the operation of the BB. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the BB ends when more than 59 medals are paid out in the BB. If more than 59 medals have not yet been paid out, the BB operation continues. On the other hand, when more than 59 medals are paid out, the transition to ART at the end of BB is performed. The transition lottery (F) at the end is a lottery performed according to the BB mode, and the larger the value of the BB mode, the higher the winning probability of the ART.

  When BB ends in a state of winning ART, ART (Enemy Art) starts from the next game. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, during the BB, while in the situation of carrying over the part associated with JACIN as an internal winning combination, transition to the high RT state (RT4 gaming state), a symbol according to the part associated with JACIN When the combination of is displayed, it shifts to the low RT state (RT2 gaming state). And since the RT gaming state in BB is maintained after the BB end, the high RT state or the low RT state will be in accordance with the result of the game in BB after the BB end.

  In the Pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when BB ends in a state of winning ART, ART may be executed at the timing when it shifts to the high RT state, and regardless of the type of RT gaming state, It is also possible to execute ART (more specifically, AT). That is, when the BB ends in the low RT state, the enemy determination ART may be started without waiting for the transition to the high RT state. The enemy determination ART in this case has a low probability that the player who is involved in the replay is determined as an internal winning combination, but reports the order of the correct answer according to the pressing order, and according to the control in the enemy determination ART, A production ball is set. As described later, during enemy determination ART, as a result of an ally character being set in the apocalypse, the HP of the ally character may increase, and when the HP of the ally character increases, the subsequent battle ART is won The possibility of (continuation) increases. Even if the enemy determination ART is started in the low RT state, it is possible to give the player the benefit of an increase in the HP of the ally character (that is, an increase in the continuation expectation of the ART gaming state). It is possible to reduce the disadvantage received by the player who has finished BB.

<ART lottery table at the start of BB>
FIG. 98 is an ART lottery table at the start in BB referred to in the transition lottery at the start in BB. The start-up ART lottery table during BB is referred to in the case where the sub-side abbreviation “seven sets of ripples” is determined, and defines the information of the lottery value for the transition lottery result to ART. As shown in FIG. 98, in the case where the sub-side abbreviation “7 sets of ripples” has been determined, ART will always be won in the transition lottery (F) at the start.

  Here, referring to the table of winning combinations shown in FIG. 96, the main between JAC 2 flags (when JACIN 2 is carried over as an internal winning combination) and between JAC 3 flags (when JAC IN 3 is carried over as an internal winning combination) is main Only the three “F_ 312 upper row 7 assortment” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are “7 assortment ripples” on the side. On the other hand, between JAC1 flags (when JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), "F_312 upper row 7 sets" to "F_2nd cross 7 sets" on the main side "F_J1 upper layer 7 lip" to "F_J1 cross 7 A total of six, including the three "rips," is a "seven match". Therefore, in Pachislot 1, the probability of winning ART in the transitional lottery (F) at the start differs depending on the type of the carryover combination carried forward in BB.

<BB mode up lottery table>
FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 are BB mode up lottery tables referred to in the mode up lottery in BB mode. The BB mode up lottery table defines information of lottery values for the current BB mode and the result of lottery of mode up lottery for each internal winning combination.

  Referring to the BB mode up lottery table, when the current BB mode is 0, if any one of push bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry or chan lip is determined as an internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. That is, there are six types of winning combinations that can be mode-up from BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that can be mode-up from BB mode 1, and there are four types of winning combinations that can be mode-up from BB mode 2. There are three types of winning combinations that can be uploaded, and two types of winning combinations that can be upgraded from BB mode 4.

  In addition, a winning combination that is likely to be mode up from BB mode 4 is included in a winning combination that is likely to be mode up in BB mode 3, and a winning combination that is likely to be mode up from BB mode 3 as well Is included in the possible combination of mode up in BB mode 2 and the possible combination of mode up in BB mode 2 is included in the possible combination of mode up in BB mode 1 A winning combination that is likely to be mode up from BB mode 1 is included in a winning combination that is likely to be mode up in BB mode 0.

  As described above, in Pachi-Slot 1, as the BB mode goes up, the types of winning combinations that may be mode up are set to be smaller, and the winning combinations that can be mode up with the BB mode high are: Even when the BB mode is low, the mode may be up.

  In the BB mode up extraction table illustrated in FIGS. 99 and 100, the mode is enabled by skipping the BB mode instead of step by step (for example, BB mode without going from BB mode 0 to BB mode 1) The mode can be upgraded to 2 or more). In this respect, in the BB mode, it is possible to configure the BB in-mode-up lottery table so that the mode is always up only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode increases only one step at a time, the degree of expectation during staying in each BB mode decreases, so the BB mode can be compared with the case where it is possible to skip the BB mode. Can be set to increase the degree of expectation that As a result, since it becomes easy to go up to a certain BB mode in BB, it becomes easy to make a game form in which the BB mode is gradually mode up.

  Here, referring to the BB middle-mode-up lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, when the internal winning combination is "CHANRIPE", the BB mode tends to rise. In addition, referring to the table of winning combinations shown in FIG. 96, only five of the main side "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are "Champ lip" between the JAC 1 flags and the JAC 3 flags. On the other hand, among JAC 2 flags, a total of 10 pieces of the main "F_J3 chance lip 1"-"F_J3 cherry lip" plus five of "F_J2 chance lip 1"-"F_J2 cherry lip" "It has become. Therefore, in Pachislot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carryover part carried forward during BB, and as a result, the transition at the end of BB is carried out according to the type of carryover part carried forward during BB. In the lottery (F), the probability of winning ART will be different.

<ART lottery table at the end of BB>
FIG. 101 is a BB end ART lottery table referenced in the transition lottery (F) at BB end. At the end of BB, the ART lottery table defines information of lottery values for the transition lottery result to ART for each state in BB and each BB mode. At the end of BB in FIG. 101A, the ART lottery table at the end of BB is referred to in the main-side gaming state “RB gaming state in bonus state” and “RT4 gaming state in bonus state”, and BB in FIG. At the end time, the ART lottery table is referred to in the main-side gaming state “RT0 gaming state in bonus state” and “RT2 gaming state in bonus state” (see FIG. 17).

[Game in ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 121, the flow of the game in the ART gaming state (also referred to as “in the ART”) will be described. FIG. 102 is a schematic view of the flow of the game during the hostile ART, FIG. 103 is a schematic view showing the flow of the game during the battle ART, and FIGS. 104 to 121 are referred to during the ART Data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 121 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of the flow of games in ART>
As shown in FIG. 102, when winning the transition lottery to ART in the normal gaming state (normal gaming state, high probability gaming state, CZ) or bonus state, the sub control circuit 101 responds to the situation in which the transition lottery is won. Randomize ART state. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation for the continuation of the ART gaming state is different, and basically, the larger the numerical value of the ART state, the easier it is for the ART to continue (advantage to the player). When the ART state is determined and the gaming state on the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the hostile ART starts.

  When the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation during the enemy determination ART, the effect ball set in the apocalypse is lottery. In the enemy determination ART, production balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for determining an enemy character to fight during battle ART, and an ally ball for increasing the HP of the ally character are set in the apocalypse . The ART state determined before the start of the enemy determination ART is referred to in the lottery of the directing ball, and the boss state in which the ally character is more likely to win is set more in the apocalypse as the ART state is larger.

  The lottery of the effect balls is performed based on boss MAP data and an ART state defined in a boss MAP described later. During the hostile ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then the boss MAP with a larger numerical value is set as the same hostile ART continues.

  It should be noted that if you set the boss ball in the apocalypse immediately after the start of the hostile ART, the hostile ART may end soon after the start. Therefore, at the start of the enemy determination ART, it is possible to set a guaranteed number of times in which the production ball is not set in the apocalypse. In this way, since the enemy determination ART continues for the minimum number of guarantees, it is possible to prevent the hostile ART from ending immediately after the start. The guaranteed number of times may be a predetermined fixed number (for example, 5 games etc.), or may be determined by lottery at the start of the enemy determination ART. In addition, if the number of guarantees is different between the hostile determination ART (so-called first hit) started with winning the transition to ART and the hostile determination ART started with the continuation of the ART gaming state It is also possible to Also in this case, the fixed guarantee number may be made different in both cases, and the lottery probability of the guarantee number may be made different in both cases. Further, when the ART gaming state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be made different depending on the type of enemy character played in the battle ART at the time of continuation. Also in this case, the fixed number of guarantees may be made different depending on the type of enemy character played in the battle ART at the time of continuation, or the lottery probability of the number of times of the guarantees may be made different.

  Subsequently, the HP of the ally character is determined. The HP of the ally character determined here is to be used in the subsequent battle ART. Note that the HP of the ally character is determined based on the initial determination performed in the first game of the enemy determination ART and the later-described additional lottery performed when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse.

  The initial determination is different in control depending on whether or not the HP of the current ally character is less than the initial value (HP50), and the sub control circuit 101 initializes the HP of the ally character if it is less than the initial value. The value is determined, and if it is equal to or more than the initial value, the HP of the current ally character is maintained as it is. In Pachislot 1, when the ally character wins in the battle ART, the enemy determination ART is performed again. At this time, the HP of the ally character is fluctuating according to the result of the continued ART (eg, the HP increase due to the ally ball (overlay lottery) in the contending ART of the continued ART, the battle ART of the continued ART) In the new enemy determination ART after continuation, because the enemy ball (enemy attack) in the middle), the new enemy determination ART will set the HP of the ally character according to the fluctuation from the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 performs control in accordance with the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game. For example, when the boss ball is set, it is determined whether or not the pushing order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination If yes, the boss corresponding to the type of boss ball set in the apocalypse in the current game is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an opponent determining means, and determines an opponent in the battle ART in accordance with the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse in the current game.

  When the battle ART opponent is determined in this way, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The determination of the enemy character's HP is performed based on the internal winning combination of the next game for which the opponent has been determined. For example, if the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character's HP will be reduced. To be determined. When the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART (boss ball pushing order bell winning) and the enemy character's HP is determined (next game internal winning combination), the enemy determination ART ends, and from the next game Battle ART will be started. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a second advantageous state start means, and determines the HP of the opponent and the enemy character of the opponent based on the boss ball set in the enemy determination ART. End the enemy determination ART and start the battle ART from the next game.

  On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the ally ball, the sub control circuit 101 performs the HP addition lottery of the ally character. In this additional lottery, the HP of the teammate character is increased (superposed) based on the internal winning combination. Specifically, when an ally ball is set in the apocalypse in the current game, the player wins the extra lottery with “Bell to win” or more, and the HP of the ally character is increased. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical addition means, performs HP addition lottery of the ally character based on the internal winning combination when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse, and the lottery result The HP of the friend character is increased (added) on the basis of. In addition, "bell tomb" is that pushing order bell or common bell is decided as an internal winning combination, and "bell torn" or more is "bell torn" or net out, watermelon, weak cherries, strong Any of the rares, such as Cherry and Chanlip, will either be determined as internal winnings.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the enemy determination ART is repeated until an opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the first advantageous state control means, and determines the enemy character to fight during the battle ART, the HP of the ally character, and the additional lottery when the ART continues. Etc.

  As shown in FIG. 103, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation during the battle ART, the effect ball set in the apocalypse is lottery. In the battle ART, directing balls such as an ally ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball for determining a character to attack are set in the apocalypse. As described later, parameters such as an attack power, a defense power, and a speed are set to each enemy character, and the lottery of the effect ball is performed according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, the higher the speed of the enemy character, the higher the probability that the enemy ball is extracted, and the lower the speed of the enemy character, the higher the probability that the teammate ball is extracted.

  Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect balls set in the apocalypse. Specifically, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball, the ally character attacks the enemy character with “Bell win” or more, and the HP of the enemy character Decreases. In addition, if the directing ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the awakening ball and it is "Bell tomb" or more, the ally ball is stocked, and the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is the stocked portion It is rewritten to the ally ball.

  On the other hand, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the enemy ball, the enemy character attacks the ally character at “Bell Toku”, the HP of the ally character decreases, and “Lea role” The ally character attacks the enemy character in the winning game, and the HP of the enemy character decreases. In addition, "the role of rare" is that any of the roles of rare, such as net-off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and chan lip, is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Here, the decrease amount of HP of the ally character at the time of attacking the enemy character differs according to the attack power set to the enemy character, and the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character is larger as the enemy character has higher attack power. The lower the enemy character, the smaller the reduction amount of HP of the ally character. Similarly, the reduction amount of the enemy character's HP at the time of attacking the ally character differs depending on the defense power set to the enemy character, and the enemy character with a higher defense strength has a smaller reduction amount of the enemy character's HP and the defense power The lower the enemy character is, the larger the reduction amount of the enemy character's HP is. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical subtraction means, and reduces the HP of the teammate character when the effect ball set in the apocalypse during the battle ART is an enemy ball (third effect information). In the case of an ally ball (fourth effect information), the HP of the enemy character is decreased (subtracted).

  As shown in FIG. 103, the battle ART ends when the HP of any of the teammate character and the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the battle ART is ended, and the ART gaming state for one set is ended. On the other hand, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0, the battle ART ends while the number of sets in the ART gaming state remains unchanged. Then, if the number of sets of ART gaming state remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART gaming state continues, and the battle ART is shifted to a new enemy determination ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a second advantageous state control means and an advantageous state control means, and sets to the apocalypse of the effect ball which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART, the ally character and the enemy character Control of the transition to ART, which is the battle with the player, the termination of the ART gaming state based on the result of the battle, or the continuation of the ART gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a continuation control means, and when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle, or although the HP of the ally character becomes 0, it is in the ART gaming state. If the number of sets remains, etc., the ART gaming state is continued, and the gaming state is shifted from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART.

<ART state lottery table>
FIG. 104 is an ART state lottery table referred to in order to lottery an ART state upon winning a transition lottery to an ART. The ART state lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the ART state for each situation when winning transition to ART. For example, when winning in the transition lottery to the ART performed during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, refer to the ART state lottery table in the "normal gaming state, high probability gaming state" column. And the ART state is lottery. Similarly, when a transition to ART in CZ is won in lottery (C), the ART state is extracted with reference to the ART state lottery table according to the CZ mode in CZ. In addition, when a transition to ART during bonus state is won in the lottery (F), the ART state is lottery with reference to the ART state lottery table of the "bonus state column".

  Referring to FIG. 104, when a transition lottery is won in CZ mode 2, an ART state having a larger numerical value is extracted compared to the case where a transition lottery is performed in CZ mode 0, 1 or other cases. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is the CZ mode in the case of a full run in the CZ, and the ART state is a state in which the ART is more advantageous to the player as the numerical value is larger (the ART is more likely to continue). In the case of a full run, it is understood that not only the ART transition but also a more advantageous state for the player is obtained.

<Various data tables to refer to during the hostile ART>
Subsequently, various data tables referred to during the enemy determination ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 111.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 105 is a boss MAP lottery table for lottery a boss MAP for determining a rendering ball to be set in an apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the hostile ART, the boss MAP “1” is first set, and then, when the boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP is 0, a new boss MAP is extracted. The boss MAP lottery table of FIG. 105 is a table referred to in order to lottery a new boss MAP when the boss MAP data is zero.

  Referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, it is understood that the pachi slot 1 makes it easy for the boss MAP having a large numerical value to be lottery whenever the boss MAP is lottery. Specifically, the boss MAP “3” is easily extracted from the boss MAP “1”, and similarly, the boss MAP “5” is easily extracted from the boss MAP “3”. On the other hand, when the boss MAP “4” is extracted from the boss MAP “1”, the boss MAP “3” is easily extracted from the boss MAP “4”, so the value of the boss MAP decreases once. However, since the boss MAP “5” is to be extracted from the boss MAP “3” after that, as a result, whenever the boss MAP is extracted, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is extracted.

  Also, referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, if the boss MAP is updated to the boss MAP “52” as a result of the lottery of the boss MAP being repeated, then, the boss MAP “52” or the boss MAP It can be seen that only one of "53" is lottery and the other bosses MAP are not. As will be described in detail later, when these bosses MAP “52” and “53” are set as bosses MAP, the effect balls advantageous to the player are determined as the effect balls set in the apocalypse. Therefore, although the bosses MAP “52” and “53” set as a result of the repeated lottery of the bosses MAP are said to be the ceilings of the bosses MAP, when reaching the ceilings of the bosses MAP, an effect advantageous to the player The ball will be set to the apocalypse.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
In the boss MAP, boss MAP data is defined for determining a rendering ball to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined in each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 106, in the boss MAP1, boss MAP data "1" is defined for the first to fourth games, and boss MAP data "0" is defined for the fifth game. When boss MAP data “0” is defined, a new boss MAP is extracted with reference to the boss MAP extraction table shown in FIG.

<Enemy determination ART production ball lottery table>
FIGS. 107 and 108 show an enemy determination ART during production ball lottery table for determining a production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the hostile determination ART. The during-ART effect ball lottery table defines boss MAP data and information of lottery values for effect balls set for each ART state. In (A) of FIG. 107, although information on the lottery value for the effect ball is defined also for the boss MAP data “0”, a boss newer than the effect ball lottery based on the MAP data “0” If priority is given to MAP lottery, it will not be used.

  Referring to FIGS. 107 and 108, when the boss MAP data is “1” “2” “4”, the effect balls to be lottery are substantially constant regardless of the state of the ART, while the boss MAP data “3” In the case of “1”, the effect balls randomly selected in accordance with the ART state are largely different. For example, referring to ART state “28” or more in the case of boss MAP data “3”, it can be seen that either boss ball 7 or 8 is determined as the effect ball. The boss balls 7 and 8 are effect balls for which continuation of the battle ART is determined when determined as an opponent (see FIG. 68). Further, referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 106, it is understood that boss MAP data “3” is defined in many boss MAPs, and in many cases, effects are produced based on boss MAP data “3”. It can be seen that

  From this, it can be seen that the larger the ART state value, the more advantageous the ART for the player. Also, since "28" or more are drawn out as ART state when CZ is completed (see FIG. 104), CZ is completed. It can be seen that the transitioning ART is easy to continue.

  Also, referring to FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, when the boss MAP is “52”, “4” is defined as boss MAP data, and one of the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined is It turns out that it is decided as a production ball. Similarly, when the boss MAP is "53", it is understood that "2" is defined as boss MAP data, and an ally ball for increasing the physical strength (HP) of the ally character is determined as the effect ball.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 105, the bosses MAP “52” and “53” are ceilings of the bosses MAP set when the lottery of the bosses MAP is repeated. Then, when reaching the ceiling of the boss MAP, only the boss balls 7, 8 whose continuation is determined or the ally balls which increase the HP of the ally character will be set in the apocalypse, and the subsequent ART can be continued It turns out that it becomes. That is, in the present embodiment, the boss MAP lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a boss that defines boss MAP data (information on lottery value) for determining an effect ball to be set in an apocalypse during enemy determination ART A lottery information storage unit that stores a plurality of MAPs (lottery information) is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes lottery information determination means, determines the boss MAP with reference to the boss MAP lottery table, and determines the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse based on the boss MAP. Then, the boss MAP is updated to another boss MAP.

<Enemy decision during ART production ball upgrade lottery table>
FIG. 109 shows an enemy determination ART-in-progress ball upgrade / extraction table to be referred to in order to rewrite an enemy ball set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART into an alligator ball. An enemy determination ART during production ball upgrade lottery table defines information of lottery value for stock number of ally balls for each internal winning combination. When stock of one or more ally balls is determined by this lottery, boss balls are rewritten as ally balls by an amount corresponding to the number of stocks. In addition, the timing which rewrites a boss ball to an ally ball is arbitrary. Referring to FIG. 109, when the role of rare (pure net, watermelon, weak cherries, strong cherries, chan lip) is determined as an internal winning combination during the hostile ART, an alligator ball is stocked.

(Rewriting to ally balls)
Here, with reference to FIG. 155, an operation example at the time of rewriting a boss ball to an alligator ball will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation at the time of rewriting a boss ball to an alligator ball during an enemy determination ART.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the sub-RAM 103 in the present game, boss ball 1 in the storage area "1", boss ball 2 in the storage area "2", boss ball 1 in the storage area "3", storage area The boss ball 4 is stored in “4”, the ally ball is stored in the storage area “5”, and the boss ball 3 is stored in the storage area “6”. As described above, the effect balls stored in the storage areas “1” to “5” of the sub RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the apocalypse, and the effects stored in the storage area “6” of the sub RAM 103 The ball is not set in the apocalypse (not shown).

  When rewriting to the ally ball is not performed (stock of ally ball is “0”), the effect ball stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 slides as shown in FIG. In the game storage areas "1" to "5", effect balls stored in the game storage areas "2" to "6" are stored, and in the next game storage area "6", lottery is performed. The produced effect ball is newly stored.

  On the other hand, when there is a stock of ally balls, the boss balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten to the ally balls. FIG. 155 (b) is an example of rewriting the boss ball when the stock of the ally ball is "2". When the stock of the ally ball is "2", the two boss balls are rewritten to the ally ball. Since the effect balls stored in the storage area "1" of the current game are not present in the next game, they are stored in the storage areas "2" and "3" of the current game in the example shown in FIG. The two boss balls that are present are rewritten to be ally balls in the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), boss balls in the near side (storage area “1” among storage areas “1” to “6”) are to be sequentially rewritten as allies, but the rewriting target is The method of determining the boss ball is arbitrary. For example, the boss balls 1 to 8 may be prioritized, and the boss ball to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority. It is also preferable to set this priority, for example, based on the continuation expectation of the battle ART. That is, the continuation expectation degree of the battle ART may be set for each of the boss balls 1 to 8 and determined as the boss ball to be rewritten in order from the boss ball having the low (or high) continuation expectation degree.

  In addition, it is also preferable to set the priority based on the number of stocks of the team balls. For example, when the stock number of allied balls is a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8, When the number of stocks of the ally balls is a specific number (for example, “2”), the boss balls to be rewritten are determined based on the second priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8.

  Further, it is also preferable to set the priority based on the internal winning combination when stocking the ally balls. For example, in the case where stock of ally balls is performed triggered by the predetermined winning combination (for example, watermelon) being determined as the internal winning combination, based on the first priority set for boss balls 1 to 8 When the stock of ally balls is performed with the decision that the boss ball to be rewritten is determined and the specific role (for example, the chance lip) is determined as the internal winning combination, the boss balls 1 to 8 are selected. The boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the set second priority.

  As the boss ball is rewritten to the ally ball according to the stock of the ally ball, the HP of the ally character is increased, and the HP of the ally character is less likely to become “0” in the battle ART. Become. Here, as described above, the boss balls 7 and 8 are boss balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined. If the boss balls 7 and 8 are rewritten to the allies ball, the battle ART becomes difficult to continue. Therefore, the boss balls 7 and 8 may be maintained without being rewritten as an alloy ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a specific combination rewriting means, and rewrites the boss ball stored in the sub RAM 103 to an alligator ball when the internal winning combination is made, and the target boss ball is the boss ball. If it is 7 or 8, it is maintained without being rewritten to the ally ball. Further, the sub control circuit 101 determines a boss ball to be rewritten in the first priority based on the internal winning of the predetermined combination, and rewrites it in the second priority based on the internal winning of the specific combination. Determine the target boss ball.

  FIG. 155C is a diagram showing an example of rewriting of the boss ball 7 when the boss ball 7 or the boss ball 8 is stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103. In FIG. 155 (c), the stock of the ally balls is "2", and the boss balls 1, the boss balls 7, the boss balls 1, the boss balls 4 are stored in the storage areas "1" to "6" of the game now. Allied balls and boss balls 3 are stored. When the boss ball on the near side is rewritten as an ally ball in order, the boss ball 7 and the boss ball 1 stored in the storage areas “2” and “3” are determined as the boss ball to be rewritten. In this case, while the boss ball 1 is rewritten as an ally ball, the boss ball 7 is maintained without being rewritten as an ally ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), with regard to the boss ball 7 to be rewritten, the boss ball 7 is maintained while inserting an ally ball on the front side. As a result, in the next game storage area “1”, the friendly ball inserted in front of the boss ball 7 to be rewritten is stored, and in the next game storage area “2”, the boss ball 7 is maintained as it is Be done. And in the next game storage area "3", an allied ball rewritten from the boss ball 1 is stored, and in the next game storage area "4" to "6", the storage area "4" for the current game The effect ball having the same content as "6" is stored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), boss balls 7 and 8 whose continuation of the battle ART is determined by inserting an ally ball on the front side while determining the boss ball 7 as the boss ball to be rewritten. The boss balls 7 and 8 may not be determined as the boss ball to be rewritten in the first place.

  Since it is disadvantageous for the player that the boss ball whose continuation is determined is rewritten to the ally ball, maintaining such boss ball without rewriting does not give the player dissatisfaction, It is suitable. Note that the effect ball stored in the storage area "6" is not set in the apocalypse and is not displayed, so even if it is a boss ball whose continuation is determined, it is possible to rewrite it as an ally ball. Good. Such non-displayed effect balls can not be grasped by the player, so that the player does not feel dissatisfaction even if the boss ball whose continuation is determined is rewritten to the ally ball.

<Enemy determination ART middle allies power addition lottery table>
FIG. 110 is an enemy determination ART middle team power top lottery table referred to at the time of HP top lottery of an ally character performed when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball. The hostile ART ART ally power addition lottery table defines the HP addition amount of the ally character for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 110, it can be seen that, when an ally ball is set in the apocalypse in the current game, the HP of the ally character is increased by “bell to win” or more.

<Boss power lottery table during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 111 is a boss power lottery table during enemyization ART to be referred to when determining the HP of the enemy character in the next game in which the enemy character of the opponent is determined. During the hostile ART, the boss power lottery table defines, for each internal winning combination, information of a lottery value for the enemy character's HP. Referring to FIG. 111, it can be understood that the HP of the enemy character is determined to be small when the player holds a rare combination other than pure loss. Note that the boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a table common to all enemy characters as opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing different tables for each enemy character, it is possible to determine the HP according to the personality of the enemy character.

<Various data tables referenced during battle ART>
Subsequently, various data tables referred to during the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 121. Before describing these data tables, the characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss Status Correspondence Table>
FIG. 112 is a boss status correspondence table. Statuses such as an attack power, a defense power, and a speed are set to the boss 1 to the boss 8 which are enemy characters of the opponent. For example, the boss 1 is an offensive type and has high attack power but slow speed. On the other hand, the boss 5 is a speed type, and although the attack power is low, the speed is high. During the battle ART, a match between the teammate character and the enemy character is played according to the characteristics of such an enemy character.

  The bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters whose continuation of the ART gaming state is determined when they are determined as opponents. As described above, in the ART gaming state, the number of sets of ART gaming states remains even if the enemy character's HP becomes 0 before the HP of the ally character becomes 0, or even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0. Continue if. The mode in which the ART gaming state continues when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is optional. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined to be enemy characters, the HP of the enemy character always becomes 0 before the ally character. If the bosses 7 and 8 are determined to be enemy characters, the number of sets of ART gaming state must be 1 or more (for example, the bosses 7 and 8 are determined to be enemy characters). In this case, the number of sets of ART gaming states may be incremented by one, or the number of sets of ART gaming states may not be subtracted even if the HP of the ally character becomes zero. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the ART gaming state is obtained even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 by adding 1 to the number of sets of ART gaming states. By making sure that the number of sets is left, the ART gaming state is to be continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined. Although detailed description will be omitted, if HP of the bosses 7 and 8 can be set to 0 in the present embodiment, it may be shifted to a so-called special special zone. Although the type of the additional specialization zone is arbitrary, in the case of the present embodiment, it is conceivable to add the number of sets of ART gaming states as an additional specialization zone or to add the HP of the ally character.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
FIGS. 113 to 115 are a battle MAP lottery table for lottery a battle MAP for determining an effect ball to be set as an apocalypse in the battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character to be an opponent, and defines information of lottery value for the battle MAP of the transition destination for each battle map of the transition source. FIG. 113 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 1, FIG. 114 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 2, and FIG. 115 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 5. As described later, the information on the lottery value defined in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
In the battle MAP, battle MAP data for determining a rendering ball to be set in the apocalypse is defined. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined in each battle MAP.

<Battle ART production ball lottery table>
FIG. 117 shows a production ART ball lottery table in the battle ART for determining a production ball to be set as an apocalypse in the battle ART. During the battle, the production ball lottery table defines information on lottery values for the production balls set for each battle MAP data. In (A) of FIG. 117, information on the lottery value for the rendering ball is defined also for the battle MAP data “0”, but a boss more recent than the lottery of the rendering ball based on the MAP data “0” If priority is given to MAP lottery, it will not be used.

  Referring to FIG. 117, while the battle MAP data “1” has a tendency that lottery of enemy balls is performed, the battle MAP data “2” and “3” necessarily has a teammate ball and an awakening ball. Also, referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 116, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs are in one set. Specifically, referring to the battle MAPs “1” to “7”, the battle MAP data continues as “2” and “3” after five “1” s continue, and the battle MAPs “8” to “14”, It can be seen that the battle MAPs “15” to “21” and the battle MAPs “22” to “28” are similar.

  The battle MAPs “4”, “11”, “18” and “25” are battle MAPs that are not actually lottery (the lottery value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115). Therefore, in Pachislo 1, four battle MAPs (one is not lottery) in which battle MAP data “1” for which enemy balls are easily extracted are specified and battle MAP data “2” in which allied balls or awakening balls are always extracted Six battles with two battle MAPs for which "3" is specified are in one set.

  Here, the battle MAP lottery table of FIGS. 113 to 115 is returned. In the battle MAP lottery table, battle MAP “6” “7” “13” “14” “20” “21” “Battle MAP data“ 2 ”“ 3 ”is defined in which allied balls or awakening balls are always extracted 27 ”and“ 28 ”are highlighted. Referring to the battle map lottery table, the battle MAP basically transfers to a battle map with a large number one by one in one set, or alley balls in one set or awakening balls are always extracted. It turns out that it shifts to battle MAP. Specifically, it is easy for the battle MAP "1" to be easily extracted from the battle MAP "1", or the battle MAP "6" in which allied balls or awakening balls in the same set are always extracted. I understand.

  By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this manner, in the pachislot machine 1, the number of times the enemy character attacks continuously is suppressed to a predetermined number of times (four times in the present embodiment). That is, if the battle MAP is transferred more than a predetermined number of times (five times in the present embodiment), the team moves to the battle MAP at least once, in which allied balls or awakening balls are always extracted. In addition, although battle MAP "1" moves to battle MAP "9" etc., since battle MAP "9" etc. is a battle MAP of the second numerical value in the same set, the transition of battle MAP is If the predetermined number of times is exceeded, at least once transition is made to the battle MAP in which allied balls and the like are always extracted.

  Further, comparing the battle MAP lottery tables in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, it can be seen that the probability of shifting to the battle MAP in which the teammate ball or the awakening ball is surely lottery is different depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent. For example, if the attack type and the slow speed boss 1 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. It turns out that it is relatively easy to migrate. Also, when the defensive type boss 2 (see FIG. 112) having an ordinary speed is an enemy character, a battle MAP in which an ally ball or the like is always extracted as compared to the boss 1 when referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. It turns out that it is difficult to shift to “6” and “7”, and similarly, when the speed type boss 5 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table of FIG. It is difficult to shift to the battle map “6” “7” to be performed, and it is basically understood that the battle MAP “1” is shifted to the battle MAP having a larger numerical value in order.

  Thus, in the battle MAP lottery table, lottery value information is defined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, during the battle ART, the directing ball is set based on the speed set to the enemy character, the enemy with a higher speed is set with more enemy balls, and the enemy with a lower speed is set with more friendly balls. Become.

<Battle ART in progress damage lottery table>
FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 show a damage ART in progress battle lottery table used when reducing the HP of the enemy character or the ally character in the battle ART. During the battle ART, the damage lottery table indicates the type of enemy character as an opponent, the type of effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game, and the HP of the enemy character or ally character for each internal winning combination. Define information on lottery value.

  FIG. 118 is a damage ART in progress battle lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. In FIG. 118, in order to make a difference due to the status (attack force) of the enemy character comparable, the damage lottery table during the battle ART used when the boss 1 with high attack power (see FIG. 112) is the enemy character is shown in FIG. FIG. 118B shows a damage ART-in-Battle ART lottery table used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 112) having a low attack power is an enemy character, as shown in FIG. Comparing the damage ART table during the battle ART in FIG. 118, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, “15” is easily determined as the HP decrease amount of the ally character when the opponent is the boss 1 On the other hand, when the opponent is the boss 5, it is understood that "5" is easily determined as the decrease amount of HP of the ally character.

  Also, referring to FIG. 118, even if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if it wins the rare role other than the net loss, the enemy character's HP will decrease. By thus configuring the damage lottery table during the battle ART, the player can expect that the role of the lea will be determined as the internal winning combination during the battle ART, and the interest during the ART can be enhanced. .

  Further, FIG. 119 is a damage ART extraction table during battle ART used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game is an ally ball or an awakening ball. In FIG. 119, in order to make a difference due to the status (defensive power) of the enemy character comparable, the damage lottery table during the battle ART used when the boss 1 with high defense power (see FIG. 112) is the enemy character is shown in FIG. FIG. 119 (B) shows a damage ART-in-Battle ART lottery table used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 112) having a low defensive power is an enemy character. Comparing the damage ART table in the battle ART in FIG. 119, when the opponent is the boss 1, “5” etc. is easily determined as the decrease amount of the enemy character's HP while the enemy character is the enemy when the opponent is the boss 5 It can be seen that “10” etc. is easy to be determined as the amount of decrease of HP of

  In this way, by setting the damage extraction table during battle ART according to the type of the enemy character as the opponent, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and various games during battle ART are diversified. Can be

<ART state lottery table>
FIGS. 120 and 121 are ART state lottery tables for lottery a new ART state when it is determined to continue to ART in battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines the type of enemy character of the opponent, the number of times of continuation of ART, and information of the lottery value for the ART state of the transition destination for each ART state of transition source. FIGS. 120 and 121 show the ART state lottery table to be referred to when the opponent's enemy character is any one of the bosses 1 to 6. When the enemy character of the opponent is any of the bosses 1 to 6, when the ART state of the transfer source is "31" to "33", the same ART state is determined as the ART state of the transfer destination. On the other hand, when the opponent character of the opponent is either of the bosses 7 and 8, when the ART state of the transition source is "31" to "33", although not shown, different ART states (for example, ART state "3" Etc.) will be determined as the ART state of the migration destination.

  Also, referring to FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, it can be understood that transition to an ART state with a large numerical value is facilitated when the number of continuations of ART exceeds five.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power on) of the pachislot 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, when the pachi slot 1 is powered on, the main CPU 93 performs processing at power on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the setting has been properly changed, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area in which it is necessary to erase data for each unit game (game) such as the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of a medal sensor (not shown) or the start switch 64 is checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs random number value acquisition processing (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts random number values (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number values in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs internal lottery processing (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop initialization processing (S6). In this process, reel stop control information to be used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95, and is used in the reel stop control processing of S11.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in the interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing an internal winning combination and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs wait processing (S8). In this process, when the elapsed time from the start of the previous game has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds), the main CPU 93 stands by until the wait time has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start processing (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests start of rotation of all the reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the driving of the three stepping motors is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 127 described later) which is executed at a constant period (1.1172 msec). Rotation of the reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is controlled to accelerate until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and thereafter, it is controlled to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start command generation and storage processing (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in the interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the reel rotation start, and can determine the timing etc. at which various effects are to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop control processing (S11). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S6, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R are pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 20 to 32) against the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are all stopped. . Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols specified by the symbol combination table is displayed on the pay line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S13). In this process, driving of the hopper 33 and updating of the number of credits are performed based on the number of payouts of the combination of symbols determined in S12, and medals are paid out. Further, in this processing, when the BB gaming state flag of the gaming state flag storage area is on, the number of payouts is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes counting means, and updates (subtracts) the bonus end number counter based on the number of payouts determined in accordance with the combination of symbols displayed in the bonus state. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and is provided in the main RAM 95 together with additional data (combination of displayed symbols, payout number, bonus end number counter, etc.) Save in the stored communication data storage area. Further, the winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end check processing (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 for managing an end trigger of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus operation check processing (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game, and whether or not to play again. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols. The RT check process is a process of updating the RT gaming state in the bonus non-operating state, and is omitted in the bonus state or the state between flags. Also, the details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later.

[Internal lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the internal lottery processing performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S31). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62), and sets an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 33 to 37) according to the grasped gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires random number values stored in the random number value storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random value (S33). The winning number is information attached one by one to a winning combination that may be lottery at the internal lottery table. For example, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the winning number “1” is attached to “off” and the winning number “2” is attached to “F_black and black and black”. (See Figure 33). In addition, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number "1" is attached to "F_Maintenance Lip", and the winning number "2" is attached to "F_123 Lip". (See Figure 35).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

  In S34, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the operation result is a random number, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S36). In S36, when the main CPU 93 determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S33, and repeats the processes after S33.

  On the other hand, when determining in S36 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as a data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the process of S34 again, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation result is less than 0 (negative value) in S34 (YES), the main CPU 93 responds to the current winning number. , The data pointer for small part and replay, and the data pointer for bonus are acquired (S38).

  Then, after the processing of S37 or S38, the main CPU 93 acquires an internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S40).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S41). In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S48 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is "00000000" in S41 (YES), the main CPU 93 acquires an internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storage area (S43).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is carrying over the role related to BB (S44). Referring to FIG. 60, the part related to BB is stored in either bit 2 to bit 7 of carryover combination storage area 1 or bit 2 of carryover combination storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether “1” is stored in any of bit 2 to bit 7 of the carryover combination storage area 1 or bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 2. In S44, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role associated with BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the processing of S46.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S44 that the role associated with BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT5 gaming state flag on (S45), and then proceeds to the processing of S46. Specifically, “1” is set to bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). By this processing, when the combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state between flags.

  Next, in the process of S46, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the role associated with JACIN is being carried over. Referring to FIG. 60, the role associated with JACIN is stored in any one of bit 1 to bit 3 of carryover combination storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether “1” is stored in any one of bit 1 to bit 3 of the carryover combination storage area 2 or not. In S46, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role associated with JACIN is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S48.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S46 that the role associated with JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state flag on (S47), and then proceeds to the processing of S48. Specifically, "1" is set to bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). In addition, since the role which concerns on JACIN may be determined as an internal winning combination only in the bonus state, when the role which relates to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state by this processing, the game The state can be shifted to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state.

  Next, in the process of S48, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

[Bonus end check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the bonus end check process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether "BB" is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) (S51). In S51, when the main CPU 93 determines that “BB” is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S51 that "BB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S52) ). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds 59 during the bonus state.

  In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62), and then "RB". Is determined whether it is in operation (S53). When the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that “RB” is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S56.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 performs processing at the end of RB (S54). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the possible winning number counter and the possible gaming number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (RB gaming state flag) corresponding to the "RB" in operation. Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S55).

  Next, at S56, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end processing. In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (BB gaming state flag) corresponding to "BB" in operation. As shown in S53 to S56, when the BB operation (bonus state) is ended during the RB gaming state, the game is shifted to the RT2 gaming state in which the bonus is not won after the BB is ended. On the other hand, when the operation of the BB ends in a state other than the RB gaming state, it shifts to the bonus non-winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end command generation and storage processing (S57). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. In addition, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and can perform a predetermined effect at the end of the bonus. After the processing of S57, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). "" Is determined whether it is in operation (S58). When the main CPU 93 determines in S58 that "RB" is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S58 that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the number-of-winning possible counter or the possible number-of-games counter is "0". (S59). In addition, when the winning possible number counter is "0", it means that the combination of symbols other than "out" is displayed eight times during the RB gaming state of the bonus state, and the possible gaming number counter is "0". If it is, it means that 12 games have been played in the RB gaming state in the bonus state.

  In S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the winning possible number counter nor the gaming possible number counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and the main flow (FIG. Move to S16 of 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S59 that either the winning possible number counter or the gaming possible number counter is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 performs an RB end process (S60). Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit state ending means, and the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" when the BB gaming state flag of the gaming state flag storage area is on. The bonus end processing is executed triggered by the event, thereby clearing the bonus end number counter and turning off the BB gaming state flag of the gaming state flag storage area corresponding to "BB" in operation.

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the bonus end check process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols relating to “BB” (see FIG. 38) is displayed (S71). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols relating to "BB" is displayed in S71 (YES), the main CPU 93 performs bonus operation processing (S72). In this processing, the main CPU 93 sets the BB gaming state flag of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON, and sets “59” in the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT5 gaming state flag of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to off (S73). Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus start command generation and storage processing (S74). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and adds main data together with additional data (RT gaming state flag, number of possible winnings, number of possible gamings, bonus ending number counter, etc.) It is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the RAM 95. Also, the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and can perform a predetermined effect at the start of the bonus.

  After finishing the processing of S74, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that the symbol combination relating to “BB” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 displays the symbol combination relating to “JACIN” (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not it is (S75). When the main CPU 93 determines in S75 that the combination of symbols relating to "JACIN" has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs RB operation processing (S76). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the RB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON, and sets "8" in the possible winning number counter and "12" in the possible gaming number counter. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT4 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to off (S77). After the process of S77, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and shifts the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S75 that the combination of symbols relating to "JACIN" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of symbols relating to "replay" is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols relating to “Replay” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and the processing is the main flow (see FIG. 122). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols relating to "replay" is displayed in S78 (YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic medal insertion (S79). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit state starting means, and when a combination of symbols relating to "BB" is displayed, the BB gaming state flag of the gaming state flag storage area is set to on. , Set the bonus end number counter to "59". Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit control means that executes bonus end check processing and bonus operation check processing.

[RT check processing]
Next, RT check processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is any of the RT0 gaming state where the bonus is not won, the RT2 gaming state where the bonus is not won, or the RT4 gaming state where the bonus is not won (S81) . In S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, nor the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is any (NO), the main The CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is one of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state in S81 (YES Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “Bell Eye” or “RT1 Transition Lip” is displayed (S82). When the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that neither the “bell spilled eye” nor the “RT1 transition message” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that either "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition message" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT gaming state flag that is currently on, and RT1. Turn on the gaming state. That is, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 is displayed when "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed. Causes the gaming state to transition to the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 in the RT game number counter (S84). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes an RT termination unit, and when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (high RT state), the “bell spilled eye” or “RT1 at the time of pressing order incorrect answer” When the transition lip is displayed, the RT4 gaming state is ended, and the transition to the RT1 gaming state (low RT state) is made.

  If NO in S81, S82, or following S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is not (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to processing of S91 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT0 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state in S85 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether “RT4 transition message” is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT4 transition ripple” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT4 gaming state flag. That is, when "RT4 transition ripple" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes an RT start unit, and shifts the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (high RT state) when “RT4 transition ripple” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the “RT4 transition rep” is not displayed in S88 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the “RT3 transition rep” is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT3 transition reply” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT3 gaming state flag. That is, when “RT3 transition ripple” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 in the RT game number counter (S90).

  If NO at S85 and S88, or following S87 and S90, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state where the bonus is not won or the RT3 gaming state where the bonus is not won (S91) ). In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is any (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, and the main process is performed. Move to S2 of the flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S91 that the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is either (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT game number counter (YES) 1) is performed (S92). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). When the main CPU 93 determines in S93 that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S93 that the RT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT gaming state flag that is currently on (S94). By turning off the RT gaming state flag that is currently on by this processing, the gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

<Interrupt process by control of main CPU>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is performed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs input port check processing (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S103). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes, for example, a process of subtracting the value of a predetermined timer for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S104). In this process, mainly, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are appropriately transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes command transmission means, and transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area in each process to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel control processing (S105). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R when required to start the rotation of all the reels, and thereafter rotates each reel at a constant speed, Drive control of three stepping motors. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the pay line of the display window), and for the corresponding reel. The drive control of the corresponding stepping motor is performed so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lamp 7 segment drive processing (S106). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls driving of the 7-segment display 28, and displays the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs register restoration processing (S107). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt processing.

[Sub control process]
The sub control circuit 101 executes various processes in accordance with the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Power on processing>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing power on processing of the sub CPU 102 at the time of power on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check on the sub RAM 103 or the like and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, a sound control task, and a mother task which is a task group of VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization. Further, in this initialization process, the effect balls are initialized or backed up according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state stored in the sub RAM 103, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 starts the lamp control task shown in FIG. 129 (S311). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 131 (S312). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the character control task shown in FIG. 132 (S313). In the gift control task, the driving state of the rotary workpiece 200 is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 starts the mother task shown in FIG. 133 (S313), and terminates the power on process. The mother task is a task group of VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when an image of one frame is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 Use

<Initialization or backup processing of effect balls in normal gaming state and high probability gaming state>
Here, initialization or backup processing of effect balls in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, which is performed in the initialization processing of S310, will be described.

  In the pachi slot 1 of the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 is configured of a DRAM as a work area and an SRAM for backup. The effect balls are basically stored in the DRAM, but are also stored in the SRAM for backup.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the pachislot 1, the power may be temporarily cut off during the operation of the game shop, or the power may be cut off at the end of the business of the game shop. In the pachi slot 1, in the power-on process performed when the temporarily disconnected power is turned on, the effect ball stored in the SRAM is copied to the DRAM in the initialization process of S310 to back up the effect ball And control the game situation not to change before and after the power off. On the other hand, in the power-on process performed when the power is turned on across business days, the effect balls newly extracted without storing the backup data are stored in the DRAM in the initialization process of S310.

  Specifically, the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi slot 1 detects that the power supply 44 is turned on by the power on detection circuit (not shown) disposed on the sub control board 42, and turns on the power. Is acquired from an RTC (real-time clock: not shown) arranged in the sub control circuit 101. Then, the sub control circuit 101 performs restoration or initialization of the backup data of the effect ball based on the date and time when the power on was detected. That is, in the present embodiment, the power on detection circuit disposed on the sub control board 42 constitutes a power on detection means.

  Further, the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi slot 1 detects that the power is cut off in the power supply device 44 by the power cut detection circuit (not shown) disposed on the sub control board 42, and thereby detects the sub control circuit 101. The date and time is acquired from the RTC placed in the sub-RAM 103 (SRAM) and stored in the sub-RAM 103 (power-off process). Then, the sub control circuit 101 acquires the date and time from the RTC when it detects that the power is turned on, and compares the acquired date and time with the date and time when it was detected that the power stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) was disconnected. Obtain a power-off period that indicates the time the power was disconnected. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply disconnection detection circuit disposed on the sub control board 42 constitutes a power supply disconnection detection means, and the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an acquisition means for acquiring a power interruption period. In addition, in the game in which the effect ball is set in the apocalypse as described above, when a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “bell prize winning” or more) is displayed, the probability according to the type of the effect ball being set In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a privilege giving means in order to perform the transition lottery of CZ and ART and various kinds of additional lottery in the ART (see the above-mentioned FIG. 102).

  Here, when the power is turned off with the end of business and the power is turned on with the start of business, the power-off period will be several hours or more. On the other hand, when the power is temporarily disconnected, the power-off period is only a few minutes. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 discards the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) for backup if the power interruption period is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), and the sub control circuit 101 newly adds six. Perform the re-lottering of the part of the production ball (production ball lottery in the apocalypse operation, production ball lottery in CZ, production ball lottery in enemy determination ART, production ball lottery in battle ART), and sub RAM 103 (DRAM) Remember. On the other hand, if the power-off period is less than a predetermined time, the secondary control circuit 101 copies the six production balls stored in the SRAM for backup to the DRAM (restores backup data). Then, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 before the power is turned off are maintained even after the power is turned on.

  Further, in the pachi slot 1, it is also possible to restore or initialize the backup data of the effect ball not from the power interruption period but only from the time when the power is detected to be turned on. Since the business hours of the game arcade are often determined in advance, the time when the power of the gaming machine such as the pachislot 1 is turned on in the game arcade is also generally determined. Therefore, when the time when detection of power on is detected is a predetermined time (for example, time between 7 am and 9 am), the sub control circuit 101 is turned on along with the start of business. It is determined that the effect ball is initialized. On the other hand, when the time when the power is detected to be turned on is other than the predetermined time, the sub control circuit 101 determines that the power is temporarily turned off, and restores the backup data of the effect ball.

  In addition, in the gaming machine such as the pachislot 1 in recent years, gaming machines provided with an RTC function that performs a predetermined operation according to time are also known. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is possible to restore or initialize the backup data of the effect ball based on the current time as well as the timing when the power is turned on. Specifically, when the current time is the time immediately before the start of business of the game arcade (for example, 9:50 am), the effect balls are initialized. On the other hand, when the current time is other than the time immediately before the start of the operation of the game arcade, when it is detected that the power is turned on, the backup data of the effect ball is restored.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing a lamp control task activated in S311 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes timer interrupt initialization processing (S320). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp related data initialization processing (S321).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes timer interrupt waiting (S322). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Also, a task group (not shown) of power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) of door monitoring unit communication synchronization, etc. may be mentioned.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp data analysis processing (S323), and performs lamp execution processing (S324). For example, the sub CPU 102 controls the light emission of the LED 403 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data to display an image according to the latent image 402 on the display device 10. In addition, for example, the sub CPU 102 controls the LED provided on the rotating object 200 according to the registered effect data, thereby notifying the result of the promotion lottery of the effect ball during non-display.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a call of a non-effect image that is not related to the effect such as a menu screen or an error screen (S325). Here, if it is determined that the non-effect image is not called (NO), the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a call of a non-effect image (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not a panel display is in progress (S326). Here, "in panel display" means that the LED 403 is lit in the panel device 400, and an image corresponding to the latent image 402 is being displayed. Here, if it is determined that the panel is not being displayed (NO), the process proceeds to the processing of S322.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that panel display is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently turns off the LED for panel display, that is, the LED 403 of the panel device 400, and interrupts panel display (S327). It moves on to the processing of S322. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 controls the light emission of the LEDs 403 provided on the panel device 400, the LED group 25, and the LEDs provided on the rotating object 200 according to registered effect data. Configure

  Here, since the non-effect image such as the menu screen or the error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 provided behind the panel device 400, if the non-effect image is displayed while the panel is displayed, Visibility is reduced. In this regard, in the pachislot 1, when there is a call request for a non-effect image during panel display, turning off the LED 403 of the panel device 400 prevents the decrease in the visibility of the non-effect image. Hereinafter, specific control when a non-effect image is called up during panel display will be described.

<Display method of non-effect image on panel display>
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an outline of a method of displaying a non-effect image during panel display.

  In FIG. 130, time t1 is the timing at which the effect data for panel display is read. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 makes an output request for causing the panel control board 79 to emit light based on the effect data. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the LED 403 is turned on from time t1.

  Further, time t2 is timing at which a call request for a non-effect image is detected. The detection of the call request for the non-effect image can be performed by any method. For example, a call request for an error screen indicating that the front door 2b is opened can be detected by receiving a signal for performing an error display from the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74. In addition, the menu screen call request monitors the operation status of various operation buttons (such as the selection button 18 and the decision button 19) provided on the pedestal 12, and a predetermined operation (menu activation) is performed. Can be detected by detecting

  At time t2, when the call request for the non-effect image is detected, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect data for non-effect image display and outputs the request for displaying the non-effect image on the liquid crystal relay board 77. Do. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 displays a non-effect image on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to the output request. On the other hand, in the panel control board 79, when a call request for a non-effect image is detected, the call request for the non-effect image is given priority over the output request for the LED 403 received from time t1 to turn off the LED 403. At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the sub CPU 102 continues executing the effect data for panel display. That is, in the pachi slot 1, while the light emission animation of the LED 403 is continued internally, the light emission of the LED 403 is stopped by suppressing the output port.

  As a result, as shown at time t2 in FIG. 130 (b), the display device 10 displays a non-effect image such as a menu screen. At this time, since the LED 403 is turned off, the non-effect image is not covered by the display by the panel device 400, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  Further, time t3 is timing when a request for ending the non-effect image is detected. The detection of the end request of the non-effect image can be performed by any method. For example, an error screen end request indicating that the front door 2b is opened can be detected by receiving a signal indicating that the door is closed from the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74. In addition, the end request of the menu screen monitors the operation status of various operation buttons (such as the selection button 18 and the determination button 19) provided on the pedestal 12, and a predetermined operation (menu end) is performed. Can be detected by detecting

  When detecting the end request of the non-effect image at time t3, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for non-effect image display. As a result, the non-effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 disappears. On the other hand, in the panel control board 79 which has stopped light emission of the LED 403 from time t2, light emission of the LED 403 is resumed in response to the output request of the LED 403 received from time t1. As a result, as shown at time t3 in FIG. 130 (b), the display device 10 displays an image according to the panel device 400.

  Further, time t4 is timing when execution of the effect for panel display is finished. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for panel display, and ends the output request for causing the LED 403 to emit light to the panel control board 79. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the LED 403 is turned off, and as shown at time t4 in FIG. 130 (b), the display of the image according to the panel device 400 in the display device 10 is ended. .

  As described above, in the pachi slot 1, when the call to the non-effect image is performed during the panel display effect, the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed to prevent the panel display effect from being covered by the non-effect image. Since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed, and processing such as error processing is not added to the execution processing of the rendering data itself, the pachislot 1 can simplify the processing at the time of calling of the non-rendering image and Occurrence of can be reduced.

  In addition, after turning off LED403 with having detected the calling request | requirement of a non-effect image, it is arbitrary about the conditions for restarting lighting of LED403. That is, in the above description, the lighting of the LED 403 is resumed on the condition that the end request for the non-effect image is detected, but, for example, the timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed since the call request for the non-effect image was detected. At this time, the lighting of the LED 403 may be resumed. Thereby, the effect by the panel apparatus 400 can be resumed promptly.

  Further, when a call request for a non-effect image is detected, all of the LEDs 403 may be turned off, or only a part of the LEDs 403 may be turned off. Since a non-effect image such as a menu screen is displayed at a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 11, visibility of the non-effect image is obtained even if display for panel effect is performed at a position not overlapping with the non-effect image There is no loss of As described above, since the LED 403 is an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are linearly provided, the non-effect image can be avoided by controlling the LEDs to be turned on / off according to the position where the non-effect image is displayed. Display for panel effects can be performed. For example, when a non-effect image is displayed in a rectangular area substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, the non-effect image is displayed by turning off the LEDs at the center of the LED array while turning off the LEDs at both ends. It can avoid and display for panel effects.

  Therefore, when there is a request for calling a non-effect image, the sub CPU 102 specifies an area for turning off the LED 403 according to the type of the non-effect image for which the call request has been made. Then, for the area specified by the sub CPU 102, the panel control board 79 gives priority to the call request for the non-effect image over the output request for the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display, and turns off the LED 403. For the area of (3), the LED 403 may be output in response to the output request of the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display.

  Thereby, a non-effect image can be displayed while continuing the panel display effect by the panel device 400. In this case, by specifying the area in which the LED 403 is turned off according to the type of the non-effect image, the panel display effect can be continued in a wider area, which is preferable.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing a sound control task activated in S312 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of sound related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 23L, 23R (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an analysis process of sound data (S331), performs a sound effect execution process (S332), and executes the process of S331. In the sound effect execution process of S332, various sounds corresponding to the game are output, and an example thereof is shown below.

<Sound production execution processing during ART continuation>
In Pachislot 1, in order to control the continuation of ART based on the victory during the battle ART, basically, it is not known whether the ART continues until the battle ART is over (until the victory or defeat is decided). However, if there is more than one ART set number (see FIG. 71 etc.), ART will continue even if defeated to battle ART, and bosses 7 and 8 will be determined as opponents of battle ART. Because ART will continue, the continuation of ART may be decided before the battle ART is over.

  The pachislot 1 may notify the player in advance that the currently executing ART is to be continued by performing a predetermined sound effect execution process when the continuation of the ART is determined. Specifically, Pachi-slot 1 outputs a first sound continuously output during ART, a second sound continuously output during ART, and a sound during ART as sounds during ART. And a third sound. The first sound is a dedicated song in the ART that is output regardless of whether the ART continues, and the second sound is another dedicated song in the ART that is output only when the ART continues, The third sound is a sound effect (siren) that is output only when ART continues.

  As a method of informing the player that the ART is to be continued by the sound effect execution process, for example, changing the song in the ART from the first sound to the second sound in the middle of the ART, and from the start of the ART. A variety of modes can be considered such as making the song in the ART the second sound, and outputting the third sound at the start of the ART or on the way. In this case, when the first sound is changed to the second sound, the player may not be able to grasp that the music has changed depending on the connection of the music, and the second sound is output from the start of ART. In some cases, a player who is not accustomed may not be able to know whether the song is output when ART is determined to continue.

  Therefore, the pachislot 1 outputs a sound effect such as the third sound before outputting the second sound, thereby making it easy for the player to recognize that the ART is to be continued.

<Product control task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the accessory control task activated in S313 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of item-related data related to the driving state of the rotating object 200 (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an analysis process of the character data (S341), performs a character effect execution process (S342), and executes the process of S341. Note that, in the feature effect execution processing of S342, the rotary role product 200 is driven in various modes according to the game, and an example thereof will be shown below.

<Feature control at promotion lottery>
As described above, the pachi slot 1 opens the cover member 198 of the rotating object 200 so that the eyeball main body 203 can be viewed from the player when performing elevation lottery of non-displayed effect balls. Specifically, when winning the lottery using the prize movable lottery table shown in FIG. 85, the sub CPU 102 sets the prize data for opening the cover member 198. When the sub CPU 102 controls the rotating object 200 based on the item data, the eyeball main body 203 can be visually recognized from the player when performing elevation lottery of effect balls.

<Feature control in ART>
In the pachislot 1, during the ART, the rotary character 200 is driven in various manners, and the rotary character 200 is used to express that the current gaming state is a special gaming state. For example, the cover member 198 of the rotary character 200 is opened and closed, the rotary character 200 is driven so that the eyeball character blinks, or the cover of the rotary character 200 is interlocked with the start operation of the start lever 16. By making the member 198 half open, leaving the eyeball member 205 half exposed, or moving the eyeball member 205 left and right while the cover member 198 is open, the eyeball's character looks over the surroundings The rotary role product 200 is driven. As described above, in the pachi slot 1, the movable portion of the rotary combination 200 moves to a predetermined position during the ART, and by providing a unique effect, the game in the ART is boosted.

  Here, depending on the player, the game may be interrupted to temporarily release the seat during the ART, or to operate a portable terminal or the like (smart phone or mobile phone) after operating the start lever 16. Until the situation where such a player does not exist or the situation where the game is interrupted even if the player exists, the rotary role product 200 is continued to be driven or the cover member 198 is kept in the half open state. In this case, the motor 214 (see FIG. 7) for driving the rotary product 200 and the motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 are consumed, leading to failure. Therefore, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the player leaves the seat during the ART or suspends the game, the driving of the motor related to the rotating role thing 200 is stopped and the predetermined position (for example, the cover member 198 is The rotating part is returned by returning the movable part of the rotating part 200 to the initial position (for example, the position where the cover member 198 covers the eyeball member 205 (so-called, the state in which the eyes are closed)). Reduce motor consumption related to 200. When the cover member 198 is half open, a motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 needs to keep the motor excited to keep the cover member 198 half open. The motor (not shown) is worn out.

  Although the method for detecting the player's leaving or the interruption of the game is optional, in Pachislot 1, for example, during the ART (more specifically, when the rotating role 200 in the ART is driven, or When the cover member 198 is in a half-opened state, the non-operation time indicating a period in which the player does not receive the operation is measured, and the non-operation time exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), The player may leave the seat or interrupt the game. That is, when the player is playing a game, some operation such as an operation (for example, start operation or stop operation) associated with the game or an operation of the menu screen is performed, and thus the operation of the player is not performed for a predetermined time. It is determined that the player has left the seat or interrupted the game.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 moves the movable portion of the rotary combination 200 from the initial position to a predetermined position until no operation time reaches a predetermined time during the ART, thereby providing a unique effect during the ART. During this time, when the non-operation time reaches a predetermined time, the movable part of the rotary product 200 is returned to the initial position, thereby reducing unnecessary wear. After that, when the player performs some operation, the non-operation time is cleared, so the sub CPU 102 moves the movable portion of the rotating role piece 200 from the initial position to the predetermined position, and performs special effects during ART. Do. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a clocking means, and counts the non-operation time during which no game operation is performed when the movable portion of the rotary combination 200 is at a predetermined position.

  From the player's point of view, when the player returns from the seat or resumes the game, the effect of the rotating role piece 200 is finished, so there is also a possibility that the ART may be finished. is there. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102 returns the movable part of the rotary combination 200 to the initial position, the sub CPU 102 continues to notify that it is in ART by the light emission of the LED, the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R. You may do it. Compared to a member which is physically consumed like the movable part of the rotary product 200, the possibility that the pachi slot 1 breaks down can be suppressed even if it is continuously performed while away from the seat. When the player does not perform any operation, the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is suppressed, for example, to display a demonstration screen from the viewpoint of energy saving, and output from the speakers 23L and 23R to suppress the volume leaking to the surroundings. It is common practice to reduce the sound being played. Therefore, it is more preferable to control the light emission of the LED than the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R as a method of continuously notifying that the ART is being performed.

<Mother task>
FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the mother task activated in S314 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the main task activated in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes VSYNC interrupt initialization processing (S360), and executes VSYNC interrupt waiting (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started up in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S370), and executes a check of the received command (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a command different from the previous one has been received (S372). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing of S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 checks the order of the command received this time and the command received last time (S373), and the order of commands is correct. It is determined whether or not (S374). In gaming machines such as pachislot 1, medals are inserted, reel rotation start (operation of start lever 16), reel stop accompanying the first stop operation to third stop operation (operation of stop button 17L, 17C, 17R), reel Since the game is performed in the order of the determination of the combination of symbols displayed after stopping and the provision of benefits according to the symbol combination, the order of commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is also determined. The processes of S373 and S374 are processes of determining whether or not the commands have been received in a predetermined order. If the received command is a command not related to the progress of the game, the sub CPU 102 does not determine the order of the commands.

  If it is determined in the process of S374 that the order of the commands is abnormal (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets a sequence error (S375). Here, the sequence error is an error that is detected when the secondary control circuit 101 receives various commands from the main control circuit 91 and receives commands in an order that can not occur in a normal game. For example, a sequence error corresponds to the case where the sub control circuit 101 receives a reel stop command and then receives a start command without receiving a winning operation command. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a game order determination means, and determines whether or not various commands received from the main control circuit 91 are in a predetermined order, whereby the progression order of one game is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it has been performed in the order of Note that the defined order of commands in this embodiment is the order of the start command, the reel rotation start command, the reel stop command, the reel stop command, the reel stop command, and the winning operation command, and the bonus start command and the bonus end Although the command is related to the progress of the game, it is excluded from the determination of the order of the commands because it is not a command that is necessarily generated in one game.

  In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, it is decided to perform CZ end determination etc. according to the displayed combination of symbols, and when the sub control circuit 101 can not receive the winning operation command, the assumed game is A game different from the flow will be played. For example, if a bell spill is displayed during CZ, the sub control circuit 101 will end the CZ, but if a prize operation command can not be received, it can be grasped that the bell spill is displayed. There is a risk that CZ will continue. In such a case, since the start command in the next game is received without receiving the prize operation command in the current game, the game assumed is monitored by monitoring the occurrence of the sequence error. It is possible to prevent a game different from the flow of being played.

  If it is determined in the process of S374 that the order of the commands is normal (YES), or following the process of S375, the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command, and creates the created game information in the sub RAM 103. Store (S376). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 136 (S377), and executes the process of S371.

<Command analysis process>
FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing executed in S377 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138 (S380), executes the lamp data determination process (S381), executes the sound data determination process (S382), and executes the feature data determination process. (S383), each determined data is registered (S384), and the command analysis process is ended.

  In the effect content determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 is a predetermined game from among a plurality of effects including a layer switching type effect and an effect switching type effect described later that can be switched from the effect before switching to the effect after switching according to the progress of the game The effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is selected. Further, in the sound data determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data for determining the content of the sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R according to the game, and in the character data determination process, the sub CPU 102 responds to the game The character data for driving the rotary character 200 is determined.

<Animation task>
FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the animation task activated in S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks the change with the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes object control processing (S391). Specifically, when the check result in which the game information is changing is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a request for switching of an effect (S392). Here, the switching request of the effect is determined in advance for each effect being executed, and, for example, each of the start of rotation and the start of rotation of each reel accompanying the start and each of the first stop operation to the third stop operation It is performed when the reel is stopped or when a predetermined operation button is operated. Such an effect switching request can be acquired based on a command (a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning operation command, etc.) received from the main control circuit 91. If it is determined in the process of S392 that the effect switching request has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the process of S396.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S392 that the effect switching request has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the effect after switching is a layer switching effect ( S393). If it is determined in this process that the effect after switching is a layer switching effect (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an effect (layer switching effect) after switching the image layer to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. It switches to the layer to designate (S394), and moves to processing of S396. On the other hand, if it is determined in S393 that the effect after switching is not a layer switching effect (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an effect to be executed in the image layer currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. To the effect after switching (S395), and the process proceeds to the process of S396.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes animation task management processing (S396). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order and the like of images displayed in various effects. When the sub CPU 102 executes the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S390.

<Concrete processing when switching effects>
Here, the method of switching the effect when there is a request to switch the effect will be specifically described. In pachislot 1, the progress of the effect is interlocked with the player's operation by switching the effect in response to the progress of the game such as the stop operation or the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, the chance button). . In pachislot 1 in advance, in pachislot 1 by switching the layer in which the effect is being executed, the layer switching type effect of switching the effect in accordance with the progress of the game and the effect to be executed in the same layer are switched. The effects are switched into effects according to the progression of the effects, and are classified and set.

  Then, in the pachislot machine 1, when there is a request for switching of the effect, switching of the effect is controlled based on the relationship between the effect currently being executed and the effect after switching. Specifically, in the case of a layer switching type effect, the effect after switching is executed in a layer different from the layer in which the effect before switching is executed, and the layer to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is changed Switch the effects by doing. That is, the first layer in which the image data indicating the effect image according to the effect before switching is set and the image data indicating the effect image according to the effect after switching are set in the work area of the drawing RAM 105 The effect is switched by storing two layers and switching the layer to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the first layer to the second layer.

  In addition, in the case of the effect switching type of effect, in the layer executing the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect to be executed is changed from the effect before switching to the effect after switching. Switch. That is, the image data set in the layer stored in the work area of the drawing RAM 105 is changed from the image data indicating the effect image according to the effect before switching to the effect image according to the effect after switching Switch.

  While the layer switching type effect can reduce the occurrence of flickering due to a time lag that occurs at the time of image switching before and after switching, the processing load of image processing is because multiple layers are used simultaneously. As a result, the capacity of the drawing RAM 105 is compressed. On the contrary, since the effect switching type effect uses only one layer, the processing load can be suppressed, but flickering may occur due to a time lag that occurs when switching images before and after switching.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the relationship between the effect before switching and the effect after switching is determined in advance according to the connection of effects before and after switching, the processing load of each effect, and the like. For example, an effect that makes flicker easy to occur before and after switching is set as a layer switching type effect, and an effect that does not bother the flicker is defined as a effect switching type effect. deep. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to flicker at the time of switching of the effect, and it is possible to prevent the processing drop from occurring in response to the switching of the effect.

  In addition, the predetermined content (layer switch type effect or effect switch type effect) for each effect may be changed in accordance with the continuation of the game. For example, in a player whose game time is increased and his eyes become tired, the discomfort of the eyes becomes more noticeable due to the flickering of the image. Therefore, in the pachislot 1 in which the player who has increased the game time is playing, even if the effect is determined in advance as the effect of the effect switching type, it may be changed to the effect of the layer switching type.

  In addition, game time can be acquired by arbitrary methods. For example, the operation time of the pachislot 1 may be acquired as the game time, or the time when the player who has performed user registration in the pachislot 1 played a game may be acquired as the game time.

<Switching of production when the chance button is operated>
In the gaming machine such as the pachislot 1 or the like, the player may be prompted to perform an operation unrelated to the progress of the game, such as the chance button, and the effect may be switched when the operation is performed. Also in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player is urged to perform a button operation. For example, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an image according to the chance button while all the reels are rotating. The display prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation (pressing of the chance button). The sub CPU 102 detects that the predetermined operation has been performed based on the command received from the main control circuit 91, and further, before the predetermined operation is detected, the main control circuit 91 receives a reel stop command and the like. By receiving, it is detected that the game has progressed without performing a predetermined operation.

  Then, in the pachislot 1, the effect to be switched is made to differ depending on whether the predetermined operation prompted by the player is performed or the game progresses without the predetermined operation being performed. Specifically, the first switching request is performed when the predetermined operation for prompting the player is performed, and the sub CPU 102 performs the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching Switch to production after switching. Further, when the game proceeds without the predetermined operation being performed, the second switching request is performed, and the sub CPU 102 performs the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching to the effect after the second switching Switch to

  As described above, in the pachislot 1, since the effects to be switched can be made different depending on whether the predetermined operation prompted to the player is performed or not, the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. . Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effects can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

<Determination content determination processing>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in S380 of the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S401). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process shown in FIG. 139 (S402), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the start command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S403). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S404), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the reel stop command has been received (S405). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (S406), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S407). Here, if it is determined that a winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning operation command reception process shown in FIG. 149 (S408), and ends the effect content determination process. In the prize activation command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on information transmitted as a prize actuation command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S409). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus end command reception process shown in FIG. 154 (S410), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S411). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes bonus start command reception processing (S412), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the bonus start command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command. In addition, in the bonus start command reception process, BB mode “0” is set as an initial value of the BB mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes processing according to the other received commands (S413), and ends the effect content determination processing.

<Process when receiving start command>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high probability gaming state (S421). If it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal start time CZ · ART lottery shown in FIG. 140 (S422). In this normal start CZ · ART lottery, based on the internal winning combination and the effect balls set in the apocalypse in the current game, the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed.

  Following the process of S422, the sub CPU 102 performs an apocalypse activation process shown in FIG. 141 (S423). In this apocalypse activation process, the sub CPU 102 performs control to start or end the apocalypse activation.

  If it is determined that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high probability gaming state in S421 (NO) following the processing of S423, then the sub CPU 102 continues the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state. It is determined whether there is any (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state managed by the sub side is the normal gaming state and the RT gaming state managed by the main side is the RT4 gaming state. If it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs high probability gaming state transition processing shown in FIG. 142 (S425). In this probability game state transition process, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery of avoidance points in order to shift the game state from the normal game state to the high probability game state.

  If it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state RT4 gaming state (NO) following the processing of S425 or S424, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (S426). If it is determined in S426 that the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a high probability in-progress effect registration process shown in FIG. 143 (S427). In this high-probability effect registration process, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect (pushing order navigation) to prevent the main gaming state from shifting from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state based on the avoidance points. .

  If it is determined that the gaming state is not the high probability gaming state (NO) subsequent to the processing of S427 or S426, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is CZ (S428). If it is determined in S428 that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs ART lottery processing at CZ start shown in FIG. 144 (S429). In this CZ start time ART lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described transition lottery (C) and the like.

  Subsequent to the process of S429, or when it is determined that the gaming state is not CZ (NO) in S428, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the bonus state (BB) (S430) ). If it is determined in S430 that the gaming state is the bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an ART lottery processing during BB shown in FIG. 145 (S431). The sub CPU 102 performs the above-described transition lottery (F) and the like in the ART lottery processing during BB.

  Subsequent to the processing of S431, or when it is determined that the gaming state is not the bonus state (NO) in S430, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state (during ART) (S432). If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is the ART gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an ART-in-progress processing shown in FIG. 146 (S433). Note that, in the during-ART process, the sub CPU 102 determines an enemy determination ART, an effect content in the battle ART, and the like.

  If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state (NO), or following the processing of S433, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a sequence error is set (S434). Here, a sequence error is set when the order of commands in the main board communication task is not normal. If it is determined in S434 that the sequence error is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs sequence error processing described later (S435), and ends the start command reception processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S434 that the sequence error is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process.

<Specific Example 1 of Sequence Error Processing>
In the present embodiment, CZ ends on the condition that a combination of symbols displayed when the incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the pushing order is displayed in the game in which the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. Do. Since management of CZ is performed in the sub control circuit 101, and management of the combination of displayed symbols is performed in the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) transmits from the main control circuit 91 The end / continuation of CZ will be controlled based on the winning prize operation command. Specifically, the sub control circuit 101 ends CZ when it receives a winning operation command indicating that the combination of displayed symbols is "bell spilled eyes" (see FIG. 153 described later).

  Here, when the secondary control circuit 101 can not receive a winning operation command, the secondary control circuit 101 can not grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, so a game different from the flow of the assumed game is It will be done. For example, when "Bell spilled" is displayed in CZ, CZ will be ended on the side of sub control circuit 101, but if a prize operation command can not be received, "Bell spilled" is displayed. There is a possibility that the CZ may continue because the sub control circuit 101 can not grasp the situation.

  Here, although a sequence error may occur due to a failure of the pachi slot 1 regardless of the operation of the player, the communication between the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 is temporarily disconnected. It may be artificially generated by an illicit act such as a so-called command failure that generates a communication disconnection state. If such an act of fraud makes it possible to avoid the end of the CZ, the player who carried out the act of fraud will receive an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, the secondary control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, and terminates CZ as a sequence error has occurred if the order of the commands is abnormal. This can prevent the player from gaining an unfair advantage due to the wrongdoing.

<Specific Example 2 of Sequence Error Processing>
In the present embodiment, the RT4 gaming state on the main side in the bonus non-winning state may be treated as the sub-side high probability gaming state. This high probability gaming state ends at the timing when it is grasped that the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is displayed on the pushing order bell or pushing order lip on the sub side (see FIG. 152 described later). Therefore, when the secondary control circuit 101 can not receive a winning operation command, the secondary control circuit 101 can not grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, and a game different from the flow of the assumed game is played. It will be lost. For example, when "Bell spill" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed during the high probability gaming state, the secondary control circuit 101 ends the high probability gaming state, but can not receive a prize operation command. There is a possibility that the high probability gaming state may continue because the sub control circuit 101 can not grasp that the "bell spilled eye" or the "RT1 transition lip" is displayed.

  Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, and ends the high probability gaming state as a sequence error occurs if the order of the commands is abnormal, and the normal gaming state Migrate to This can prevent the player from gaining an unfair advantage due to the wrongdoing.

  When a sequence error occurs, a history of the generated sequence error may be accumulated. It is difficult to determine if the sequence error that occurred is caused artificially by fraudulent action, or it has occurred regardless of the player's operation due to a failure of pachislot 1 etc. By accumulating error occurrence history, it is possible to grasp the tendency of fraud (goto). For example, a sequence error that occurs due to a fraudulent action is likely to occur when it occurs in a situation advantageous to the player, and a sequence error that occurs naturally regardless of the player occurs regardless of the situation. If a sequence error occurs due to a wrongdoing, a similar history will be accumulated as the occurrence history of the sequence error. Therefore, it is possible to receive a specific command in a specific gaming state by making it possible to grasp the gaming state in which the sequence error has occurred and the type of command that could not be received by the secondary control circuit 101 from the tendency of the generation history of the sequence error By making this impossible, it is possible to grasp the situation where the player unfairly benefits, and it can be used for the design of future gaming machines.

<Normal start CZ · ART lottery processing>
FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing a normal start CZ · ART lottery process executed in S422 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 73 based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the present game, and shifts to CZ · ART. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ has been won in this lottery (S442). If CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets CZ to the gaming state of the next game (S443), and ends the CZ · ART lottery process at the normal start.

  On the other hand, if CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART has been won in the lottery of S441 (S444). If ART has not been won (NO), the normal start CZ · ART lottery processing is finished, while if ART has been won (YES), sub CPU102 is a gaming state as ART gaming state Set the hostile ART of (S445). Since the ART gaming state is the RT4 gaming state on the main side, an RT4 transition message is displayed, and the main side must shift to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, "set the hostile determination ART of ART gaming state as gaming state" does not mean that the gaming state of the next game becomes hostile ART of ART gaming state, but the RT4 gaming state on the main side When it shifts to, it means that the game state of the sub side becomes the enemy determination ART of ART game state. The same applies to the following.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, and lottery the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S446). When this processing is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ · ART lottery processing at the normal start.

<Apocalypse activation processing>
FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the apocalypse activation process executed in S423 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S457.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse activation lottery table of FIG. 79 (C), the addition amount or the subtraction amount of the number of times of guarantee is extracted based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current number of guarantees based on the lottery result of S452 (S453).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of guarantees is one or more (S454). If it is determined that the number of times of guarantee is one or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect balls, sets them in the apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the processing of S462. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 extracts the apocalypse MAP, and extracts the effect balls based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 80 to 83). Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 upgrades the effect ball set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability, when the promotion lottery is possible (when the number of guaranteed article movements is 1 or more).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of guarantees is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 updates the apocalypse flag to off, terminates the operation of the apocalypse (S456), and then proceeds to the processing of S462.

  If it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIGS. 79 (A) and (B), the addition amount of the guarantee number is lottery based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current number of guarantees based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of guarantees is one or more (S459). If it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts operation of the apocalypse (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 to the apocalypse (S461).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs shift lottery of the winning mode based on the internal winning combination (S462). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the mode transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, and lottery the winning mode of the transition destination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result as the winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse activation process.

<High probability game state transition process>
FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the high-probability game state transition process executed in S425 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects an avoidance point based on the internal winning combination (S465). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. 89, and randomly selects the addition amount of the avoidance point. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery of the avoidance point is won, that is, whether or not one or more avoidance points are added (S466). If the player wins (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S 467), and ends the high probability gaming state transition process. On the other hand, if the CPU is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability gaming state transition process.

<High probability in-progress effect registration processing>
FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing a high probability effect effect registration process executed in S427 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pushing order bell or pushing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (S471). If it is determined that neither the push order bell nor the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability in-progress effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell or push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). If it is determined that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability in-progress effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data that is correct in the pushing order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the avoidance points (S 474), and ends the high probability in-progress effect registration process.

  As described above, in the high probability gaming state, when the pushing order bell or pushing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the pushing order of the correct answer is informed based on the avoidance point. From the player's point of view, it is possible to continue the high probability gaming state by playing the game according to the notification, so it is possible to play the game with ease. Here, in the high probability gaming state, it is easier to win the transition lottery to the ART than in the normal gaming state, and in the case of notifying the pressing order of the correct answer in the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is The benefit of continuing will already be granted. Therefore, when the pressing order of the correct answer is notified in the high probability gaming state, the lottery result of the transition lottery in the game may be discarded (invalidated). This can prevent the player's profit from becoming excessive.

<ART lottery processing at CZ start>
FIG. 144 is a flowchart of CZ start ART lottery processing that is executed in S429 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 updates the number of continued games in CZ (S481). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the first game of CZ (S 482). If it is determined that the game is the first game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently lottery and set CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 91, and extracts and sets CZ_MAP used in CZ (S483).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets an initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets an initial value of invalid points with reference to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG. 93 (A).

  After S484, or if it is determined that the game is not the first game of CZ in S482 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently lottery the effect balls and set them in the apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ in-direction ball lottery table shown in FIG. 94, and randomly selects and sets the direction balls based on the final direction balls currently set. Further, in this process, when the invalidation point is one or more, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the development ball set in the apocalypse to the avoidance ball.

  It is determined whether it is the 30th game of CZ (S486). If it is determined that the game is the 30th game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the enemy determination ART of ART gaming state as the gaming state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, and extracts and sets the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 (S488). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the CZ start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not the 30th CZ game (NO), the sub CPU 102 randomly selects invalid points based on the internal winning combination and adds them (S489). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the invalidation point lottery table shown in FIG. 93 (B) (C), extracts the invalidation point addition amount, and adds it to the currently maintained invalidation point.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the development ball, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination (S490). If any of the conditions is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the invalid point is 1 or more (S491). If it is determined that the invalid point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid point (S492), and sets effect data for the present CZ mode notification (S493).

  This effect data notifies or suggests that, for example, the current CZ mode is 1 or that the CZ mode goes up from 0 to 1 in a few more (for example, two or three) games It is effect data for. Specifically, effect data having different probability of being set depending on whether CZ mode is 1 or 0, or CZ mode rising from 0 to 1 in a game within a predetermined number of times, and CZ mode within a predetermined number of times The probability of being set is different from that in the case where the game does not go from 0 to 1 in the game of. Thereby, the player can estimate or grasp the current CZ mode when the invalidation point is 1 or more.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S491 that the invalid point is not 1 or more (NO), sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table in CZ shown in FIG. 95 and shifts transition to ART based on the current CZ mode (C ) And set the lottery flag on (S494). As described above, during CZ, the development ball is set, and transition lottery (C) is performed when the push order bell is won, but the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is invalidated when correct in push order when stopping. Be done. The lottery flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result at the time of stop. After the process of S494, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the CZ start.

  On the other hand, if any of the conditions is not satisfied in S 490 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the avoidance ball ( S495). If it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the avoidance ball (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S 496), and ART lottery processing at CZ start Finish. Further, even when it is determined in S495 that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not the avoidance ball (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at CZ start. That is, in this embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes advantageous state lottery means, and performs transition to ART based on the CZ mode performed in the middle of CZ, or transition to ART based on the CZ mode 2 performed when the CZ completes. Perform a lottery.

<ART lottery processing during BB>
FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing a ART-in-BB lottery process which is executed in S431 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not seven sets of reps have been determined as internal winning combinations (S501). If it is determined that 7 sets of RIPs have been determined as internal winning combinations (YES), sub CPU 102 performs transition lottery (F) to ART in BB with reference to ART lottery table at start in BB shown in FIG. 98. . Referring to FIG. 98, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag on (S502) in order to certainly win the transition lottery (F). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the ART is won in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to at the end of the bonus.

  Subsequent to S502, or if it is determined in S501 that the seven-arranged lip has not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the BB mode up lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. And perform mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S503). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the ART lottery process during BB.

<Processing during ART>
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing ART processing in ART executed in S433 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the game state is in the enemy determination ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy determination ART is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the battle ART processing shown in FIG. 148 (S517), and ends the ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy determination ART is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the determined flag is on (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the enemy character of the opponent is determined during the enemy determination ART. If it is determined that the determined flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an enemy determination during ART processing shown in FIG. 147 (S516), and ends the during ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination with reference to the boss power lottery table in the enemy determination ART shown in FIG. (S513). Subsequently, effect data for introducing an enemy character is set (S514). The effect data for introducing an enemy character is, for example, effect data for displaying a boss status shown in FIG. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART to the next game play state (S515), and ends the in-ART process.

<Processing during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing a hostile processing during ART processing which is executed in S516 of the processing during ART shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 randomly draws the effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S521). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 lottery the effect balls based on the boss MAP data and the ART state defined in the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). In addition, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 also performs stock lottery of the ally balls, and when there is stock, rewrites the boss balls set in the apocalypse as ally balls (see FIG. 109). When using the guaranteed number of times to guarantee the number of continued games in the hostile determination ART as described above, the processing of S521 may not be performed during the game for the number of guaranteed times.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs HP initial setting processing of the teammate character (S522). In this process, when the HP of the teammate character is less than the initial value (HP 50), the sub CPU 102 sets the HP of the teammate character to the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). If it is determined that the boss ball is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the bell is hit (S524). At this time, if it is determined that the bell is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the enemy determination ART. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bell is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines an enemy character according to the boss ball as an opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined flag on (S526), and ends the enemy determination ART in-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S523 that the boss ball is not set (that is, the ally ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the enemy determination ART content ally power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, HP additional lottery of the ally character is performed (S527). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the teammate character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the process of the enemy determination ART.

<Process during Battle ART>
FIG. 148 is a flowchart of a battle ART process performed in S517 of the ART process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 lottery the effect balls and set them in the apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 lottery the effect balls based on the battle MAP data defined in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 113 to 119). Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 also performs rewriting of the enemy ball based on the awakening ball, and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the present game is the awakening ball and is equal to or more than the bell win. , Rewrite the enemy ball that is set in the apocalypse to the friendly ball.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs damage lottery based on the effect ball and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the enemy ball, the sub CPU 102 performs the damage lottery with reference to the damage ART lottery during battle ART illustrated in FIG. 118, If the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball, the damage lottery is performed with reference to the damage ARTART during damage ART illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the enemy character or the ally character based on the lottery result (S533). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the HP of the ally character is 0 or less (S534). If it is determined that the HP of the ally character is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART gaming state, sets the normal gaming state to the next gaming state (S535), and ends the battle ART in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the HP of the teammate character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). If it is determined that the HP of the enemy character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process in the battle ART. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enemy character's HP is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 120 and 121 and determines the ART state based on the enemy character type and the number of continuations. The lottery is performed and set (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART to the gaming state of the next game (S538), and ends the battle ART in progress processing.

<Process when receiving prize operation command>
FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process carried out in S408 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high probability gaming state (S541). If it is determined that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently carries out a normal termination time CZ · ART lottery shown in FIG. 150 (S 542). In this normal end time CZ · ART lottery, the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game.

  If it is determined that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high probability gaming state (NO) subsequent to the processing of S 542 or S 541, then the sub CPU 102 continues the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state. It is determined whether there is any (S543). If it is determined that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state which is the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high probability shift determination processing shown in FIG. 151 (S544). In this high probability transition determination processing, it is determined whether or not transition from the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state is possible.

  Subsequent to the processing of S544, or when it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state RT4 gaming state in S543 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (S545). If it is determined that the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs high probability end determination processing shown in FIG. 152 (S546). In this high probability end determination processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to end the high probability gaming state, based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  If it is determined that the gaming state is not the high probability gaming state (NO) subsequent to the processing of S546 or S545, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is CZ (S547). If it is determined that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a CZ internal lottery result management process shown in FIG. 153 (S548). In the CZ internal lottery result management process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the above-described transition lottery (C) performed in the middle of CZ is to be maintained or invalidated.

  When the processing of S548 is completed, or if it is determined that the S547 gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of prize operation command reception.

<Normal termination CZ · ART lottery processing>
FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing a normal termination time CZ · ART lottery process executed in S 542 of the prize activation command reception process shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the apocalypse flag is on (S551). If it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ · ART lottery process at the normal end time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether it is bell winning or more (S552). If it is determined that it is not the bell winning or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ · ART lottery process at the normal end time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell is won or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the ART lottery table at the reel stop shown in FIG. 87, and based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. Then, the migration lottery to CZ and ART is performed (A) and (D) (S553).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ has been won in this lottery (S554). If CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets CZ to the gaming state of the next game (S555), and ends the CZ · ART lottery process at the normal end.

  On the other hand, if CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART has been won (S556). When not winning the ART (NO), the normal termination CZ · ART lottery processing is finished, while when winning the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102, as a gaming state, the ART gaming state as a gaming state Set the enemy determination ART of (S 557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to lottery the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S558). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ · ART lottery process at the normal end time. That is, in the present embodiment, the secondary control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state start means, and when transitioning to CZ and ART based on the effect ball wins the CZ in the lottery (A) (D), the gaming state of the next game Is set to CZ to start CZ, which is the advantageous state lottery state.

<High probability transition judgment processing>
FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the high-probability shift judgment processing executed in S544 of the winning-operation command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bell spill or an RT1 transition message has been displayed (S561). If it is determined that a bell spill or RT1 transition ripple is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the number of replays and the avoidance point (S562), and ends the high probability transition determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the bell spill nor RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). If it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the high probability gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S 564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of replays (S565), and ends the high probability shift determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a combination of symbols relating to replay other than the RT1 transition ripple is displayed (S566). If it is determined that a combination of symbols related to replay other than the RT1 transition ripple is not displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability transition determination processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that a combination of symbols related to replays other than the RT1 transition ripple is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high probability transition determination processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 configures high probability state transition means, and based on winning of the avoidance point lottery in the above high probability gaming state transition processing (see FIG. 142), ART Transition the gaming state to a high probability gaming state with a high probability of winning the transition lottery.

  Thus, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state on the main side during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is maintained until the avoidance points are awarded, and the avoidance points are awarded. Transition to high probability gaming state. In a gaming machine in which, as in the case of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, a situation in which the game mode is accidentally shifted to the RT4 gaming state is not a penalty section but a chance section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be advantageous to the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state, by treating it as the normal gaming state until the avoidance point is awarded, it is possible to adjust the balance of the profits of both the player and the game arcade. Of course, since it is sufficient to adjust the balance between the two benefits within the entire gaming machine, it is possible to immediately shift from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state when the main side transitions to the RT4 gaming state.

<High probability end judgment processing>
FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the high probability end determination process executed in S546 of the winning process command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bell spill or an RT1 transition message has been displayed (S571). If it is determined that neither the bell spill nor the RT1 transition ripple is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability end determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bell spill or RT1 transition ripple is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S573), and ends the high probability end determination processing. That is, in this embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a low probability state transition means, and when a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the normal gaming state in which the probability of winning the transition lottery of ART is low is low. Transition the gaming state.

<CZ internal lottery result management process>
FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing a lottery result management process in CZ executed in S548 of the command reception process at the time of winning operation shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the lottery completion flag is on (S581). If it is determined that the lottery completed flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ during lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery completed flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pressing order is correct (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop operation is performed in the pushing order according to the pushing order bell winning in S490 of FIG. 144, in other words, according to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)”. It is determined whether or not a combination of symbols has been displayed. If it is determined that the correct order of pressing according to the pressing order bell has been made (YES), the sub CPU 102 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583), and ends the CZ internal lottery result management process. CZ will continue by this. In addition, as described above, when the correct order in accordance with the push order bell is given, the lottery result may be maintained while continuing the CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct order of pushing according to the pushing order bell is not made (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently judges whether or not ART has been won (S584). If it is determined that the ART is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S587), and ends the CZ internal lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART of the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S585). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to lottery the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S586). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ internal lottery result management process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state end means, and based on the fact that it is determined that the correct order of pushing the bell during CZ is not correct, the next game playing state Set the normal gaming state, or, when the CZ runs completely (YES in S486 in FIG. 144) in the above-mentioned CZ start ART lottery processing (see FIG. 144), set the ART gaming state as the next gaming state .

<Process when bonus end command is received>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a bonus end command reception process executed in S410 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs transition lottery (F) to ART based on the current BB mode with reference to the ART extraction table at the end of BB shown in FIG. 101 (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART has been won (S592). If it is determined that the ART is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the ART winning flag is on (S593). If both S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S596), and ends the bonus end command reception process.

  On the other hand, if any one of S592 and S593 is YES, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART of ART gaming state as the gaming state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to lottery the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the bonus end command reception process.

[Effect of Pachislot 1]
The pachislot 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi slot 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effect by JACIN carrying over while in bonus state>
In pachislot 1, while in bonus state, while any of the combinations (“F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2” and “F_JACIN3”) pertaining to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (while carrying over) ), Become a bonus state RT4 gaming state. In the RT4 gaming state in this bonus state, JAC1 replays such as "F_J1 upper row 7 reps" to "F_J1 cross 7 reps", JAC2 replays such as "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip" and "F_FJ3 It is possible to determine JAC 3 system replays such as chance lip 1 ”to“ F_J3 cherry lip ”as internal winning combinations (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

  The pachi slot 1 performs stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination. For example, if “JAC1 replay” is determined to be an internal winning combination with “F_JACIN1” carried over as an internal winning combination, in the game, two types of roles of “F_JACIN1” and JAC1 replay are internal It will be decided as winning combination, and similarly, if "F_JACIN2" is carried over as internal winning combination and JAC1's replay is determined as internal winning combination, "F_JACIN2" in the game concerned Two types of roles with the JAC1 Replay are decided as internal winning combinations.

  Therefore, in Pachislot 1, the stop control can be made different depending on the type of role related to the JACIN carried over, and in the case where the replay of JAC 1 system to the replay of JAC 3 system is determined as the internal winning combination, The stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in 57 is displayed. By making the benefit (ART) to be provided to the player different by using such control, in Pachislot 1, it is possible to vary whether or not to provide the benefit depending on the type of the carryover combination. The game in the state can be diversified, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when the replay of JAC1 is determined as the internal winning combination with “F_JACIN1” carried over as the internal winning combination, “7-set rep” is displayed and “F_JACIN2” is displayed. When a JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination while being carried over as an internal winning combination, "normally rep" is displayed. As described above, by making the stop control different depending on the situation where the benefit is given and the situation where the benefit is not given, it is possible to grasp whether or not the benefit is given from the combination of the displayed symbols. The person has a strong interest in the combination of the displayed symbols, and can enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  Incidentally, referring to FIG. 57, in Pachislot 1, stop control capable of displaying “7 sets of reps” is performed only in the case of replay of JAC 1 system, and in the case of replay of JAC 2 system and replay of JAC 3 It is decided to perform stop control that can not display “7 sets of reps”. In this regard, even in the case of the JAC 2 system replay or the JAC 3 system replay, stop control may be performed so as to allow display of “7 sets of reps”. Specifically, when “JAC2 Replay” is determined as an internal winning combination with “F_JACIN2” carried over as an internal winning combination, “F_JACIN1” is subjected to stop control capable of displaying “7-set rep”. Alternatively, if “J_AC2 Replay” is determined to be the internal winning combination while “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, “7-set rep” is not displayed. Similarly, when the JAC3 replay is determined as the internal winning combination with "F_JACIN3" carried over as the internal winning combination, the stop control capable of displaying "7-set rep" is performed, and "F_JACIN1" or If the replay of JAC 3 is determined as the internal winning combination with "F_JACIN 2" carried over as the internal winning combination, "7 set of reps" is subjected to stop control that can not be displayed.

  Then, when “7 sets of reps” can be displayed, by referring to the ART lottery table at the start of BB shown in FIG. 98, transition lottery to ART in the bonus state is performed, and lottery (F) is performed. Depending on the type, whether or not to give a benefit can be differentiated, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the probability that a privilege is given by making the probability that the JAC1 system replay, the JAC2 system replay, and the JAC3 system replay be determined as internal winning combinations different from each other. Difference can be made to enhance the interest of the game during the bonus state.

  In addition, the combination relationship of the carrying over role which can display "seven sets of Lips", and a winning combination is arbitrary. For example, for JAC1 replays, the carryover role that can display "7 allies reps" is only "F_JACIN1", and for JAC 2 replays, the carryover roles that can display "seven allies reps" Two types of “F_JACIN1” and “F_JACIN2” may be used, and for JAC3 replays, all “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2” and “F_JACIN3” may be the carryover roles that can display “7-set rep”. Of course, it is good also as not only such a combination but arbitrary combinations.

<Effect by high probability gaming state>
In Pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state is provided as a high RT state in which the probability of determining the role involved in the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, and winning the transition to ART notifies information on advantageous stop operations in this RT4 gaming state. By doing this, the ART gaming state is realized (see FIG. 66). It should be noted that in Pachi-Slot 1, the RT4 gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state when the correct order of pushing in accordance with the pushing order is made during the RT0 gaming state. In Pachislot 1, when not transitioning to ART, and accidentally transitioning to the RT4 gaming state due to the stop operation, transitioning to ART also occurs in the RT4 gaming state, which is not treated as a penalty but transitioned casually Perform lottery that is advantageous to players such as lottery. Since the RT4 gaming state can play a game without consuming medals because it is a high RT state, the pachislot 1 sets the RT4 gaming state not winning the ART to the transition chance segment to the ART It is possible to enhance the interest during high RT conditions where no benefit is given.

  In addition, since the transition lottery to the ART during the RT4 gaming state is performed, the strategicity for the stop operation during the normal gaming state is increased, and the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. Specifically, in the case of a pachislot that handles the case where it has accidentally shifted to the RT4 gaming state due to the stopping operation as a penalty, the stopping operation in the normal gaming state is simple (for example, the first stopping operation so as not to receive the penalty) For the left reel, etc.). In this respect, in the Pachislot 1 player, since the player does not impose a penalty during the RT4 gaming state which has accidentally transitioned, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal gaming state, and only the playability during the normal gaming state The operability can also be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, as long as there is an avoidance point, information of an advantageous stop operation (pushing order for avoiding transition to the RT1 gaming state) is notified in the RT4 gaming state which has been shifted accidentally. As a result, when accidentally transitioning to the RT4 gaming state, there is no immediate transition to the normal gaming state, and for a predetermined period, transition lottery to ART can be received with a high probability of replay winning. .

  In addition, by making RT4 gaming state a high probability gaming state with a high probability of winning the transition to ART, it is possible to make the RT4 gaming state which has accidentally transitioned into the transition chance section to ART, and a privilege is awarded. Not be able to enhance the interest during high RT conditions.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, an RT0 gaming state capable of transitioning to the RT4 gaming state as a normal gaming state and an RT1 gaming state incapable of transitioning to the RT4 gaming state are provided. In the case of pachislot machines, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the player's profit and the game shop's profit so as not to give excessive profits to either the player or the game shop. In this respect, comparing the pachislot 1 according to the present invention in which the randomly transitioning RT4 gaming state is the transition chance segment to the ART, and the other gaming machines in which the inadvertently transitioning RT4 gaming state is the penalty interval, The pachislot 1 according to the present invention is advantageous to the player over other gaming machines. Therefore, in Pachislot 1, the balance of both profits can be adjusted by providing the RT1 gaming state which can not shift to the RT4 gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variable for adjusting the balance of profits between the two, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in playability.

<Effect by apocalypse in normal gaming state (high probability gaming state)>
The pachislot 1 has a complete run CZ as a chance zone of the ART, and when the apocalypse is activated during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the transition lottery to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed (A) (D). In this transition lottery (A) (D), when the combination of the displayed symbols is "bell prize" or more, it has a probability according to the effect ball (lottery balls 1 to 4, determined ball) set in the apocalypse To be done. As described above, the transition of the gaming state is performed by performing the transition lottery (A) (D) taking into consideration not only the contents of the effect (the effect balls set in the apocalypse) but also the combination of the symbols displayed as a result of the game. On the other hand, the player's operation can be interposed, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  In addition, since the transition to CZ at the time of the reel stop lottery (A) (D) is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is "bell prize" or more, the rare role as an internal winning combination during the apocalypse operation Even if not determined, the player can receive the transitional lottery (A) (D). Therefore, compared to the case of carrying out the transition lottery of the gaming state based on the role of rare, it is possible to give many opportunities to have a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, since the operation of the apocalypse ends when the number of guarantees becomes 0, as shown in FIG. 79C, the number of times of guarantee is subtracted at the time of pushing order bell, so during the operation of the apocalypse You will be given the opportunity to receive the transition lottery (A) (D) for the guaranteed number of times (players can be subject to the transition lottery (A) (D) by making correct answers in order on the occasion) . As a result, according to Pachislot 1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no opportunity to receive transitional lottery (A) (D) at all during apocalypse operation, and to prevent deterioration of the interest of the game. it can. In addition, referring to FIG. 79 (C), the number of times of guarantee is also subtracted when the internal winning combination is “losing”. In this regard, in the case of “off”, the number of guarantees may be subtracted only in the case of the push order bell without subtracting the number of guarantees, thereby making the above-mentioned effect more apparent.

<Effect of upgrade and lottery of non-displayed production balls>
Here, in the pachislot 1, even if the apocalypse is not in operation, management of the effect balls to be set at the time of the apocalypse operation is performed. Specifically, in the pachislot 1, the elevation lottery of the effect balls (that is, the effect balls being non-displayed) stored in the sub RAM 103 in the non-operation state of the apocalypse is performed. By performing this promotion lottery in combination with driving of the revolving role 200, which is a feature of the eyeball, the player plays a game hoping to be promoted to a more advantageous rendering ball during a period in which the eyeball appears. This will improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in Pachi-Slo 1 to control the light emission of the rotating object 200 based on the result of the promoted lottery, the player has a sense of anticipation that the effect ball has been promoted to a more advantageous effect ball. It can be inferred from the color of As a result, the player can continue playing the game without getting bored because he / she can have a strong interest in the later game when it can be inferred to be advantageous.

<Management of production balls at power on>
Further, in the pachi slot 1, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten to new effect balls based on the time when the power is turned on. From the time when the power is turned on, it is known, for example, that it is the time before the business in the game arcade, and by comparing with the time when the power is turned off, it is before the business the next day. Therefore, if it is determined from the time the power is turned on that it is, for example, the start of the next day's operation, a new effect ball different from the previous day is set to change the setting value from the effect ball The presence or absence can be prevented from being grasped, and the fairness among players is not impaired. On the other hand, if it is determined from the time the power is turned on that the power is only temporarily turned off, the pachislot 1 will play the game before and after the power off by maintaining it without rewriting the effect balls. Maintain the condition of the aircraft. From the player's point of view, even if the power is turned off temporarily when the advantageous balls for the player are registered, the advantageous balls are maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play the game without feeling it.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, when rewriting the effect balls, the effect balls to be newly set are determined by lottery. As a method of making it difficult to grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value, there is also conceivable a method of rewriting the effect ball into the effect ball of the initial state defined in advance when the power is turned on the next day. When the game is installed, the diversity of the game diminishes. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the game balls are secured by determining the effect balls to be newly set by lottery.

<Effect by CZ>
The Pachislot 1 has a complete run CZ as a chance zone for ART. In this CZ, although the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ performed at the pushing order bell winning is maintained, the stopping operation is performed in the pushing order of the correct answer in the pushing order bell even if the transition drawing is performed. , Transition lottery is invalid, CZ continues. In such a CZ, since the transition lottery to the ART can be received not only at the push order bell win but also at the CZ finish, even if the push order bell does not win at all in the CZ, the player Will be given a chance to transition to ART, which will enhance the interest in CZ.

  In addition, since it is decided that the Pachi-Slot 1 gives a more advantageous privilege (transition to an advantageous ART) at the CZ completion, the player may invalidate the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ performed at the push order bell win. As a result, the user is interested in the combination of the displayed symbols, and the interest in each game in CZ can be improved. Also, from the player's point of view, it is possible to maintain the interest in the CZ until the end, since it is desired to complete the CZ more advantageous.

  Also, in Pachislot 1, an invalid point is awarded during CZ, and as long as this invalid point remains, transition lottery in the middle of CZ is invalidated. This can increase the chance of being subjected to a more advantageous CZ final run transition lottery and can improve the interest in CZ.

  Further, the pachislot 1 includes a plurality of CZ modes having different degrees of expectation to win the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuing games in the CZ. As a result, in Pachi-Slo 1, the degree of expectation of ART transition increases as CZ continues, so the player has a strong interest in the combination of symbols displayed in CZ, and the interest in CZ becomes interesting. Can be improved.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, when there is an invalid point remaining, an effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode is performed. As a result, the player can grasp or estimate the degree to which the CZ has become advantageous as a result of the continuation of the CZ, and the interest in the CZ can be improved. The effect of suggesting or informing the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of the invalid point. That is, the pachislot 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games to be shifted from the CZ mode 0 to the CA mode 1 defined in CZ_MAP with the number of continuing games of CZ up to the present.

  In addition, when winning in the shift lottery in the middle of CZ performed at the push order bell win in CZ, the lottery result may be maintained regardless of the presence or absence of the correct press order. Then, in the case of maintaining winning in the transition lottery in the middle of CZ, if the correct order is correct, CZ is continued while the rights of ART are granted by the number according to the lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of maintaining winning in the transition lottery in the middle of CZ, in the case of an incorrect answer in the pushing order, although CZ ends, the rights of ART are granted based on the lottery result.

  By doing this, it becomes possible to expect to win the transfer lottery to ART more than once during CZ, and the dissatisfaction that is felt when it is invalidated despite being originally won, It does not make the player feel. Also, for the player, if the stopping operation can be performed so that CZ does not end when the transition lottery in the middle of CZ is performed, then the transition lottery in the middle of CZ or the transition lottery at the time of CZ completion is further received. Since an opportunity can be obtained, a strong interest in the stop operation in CZ can be obtained, and the interest of the game in CZ can be improved.

<Effect by BB mode in bonus state>
Pachislot 1 has a plurality of BB modes with different degrees of expectation for winning the transition to ART in the bonus state, and promotes the BB mode based on the internal winning combination during the bonus state. Thus, the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state in order to change the probability of winning the transition to ART transition based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state. , Can enhance the interest during the bonus state.

  In Pachi-Slot 1 in particular, BB mode with low expectation rate to win transitional lottery will upgrade BB mode with many winnings, while BB mode with high expectation rate to win transitional lottery will have fewer types of wins You can only upgrade BB mode. As a result, although the type of winning combination to be upgraded to the higher BB mode decreases as the BB mode is upgraded, the degree of expectation for winning the transition lottery increases as the BB mode is upgraded, so the gaming state gradually You can create a game form that will be upgraded. From the player's point of view, instead of having an interest in one game result in the bonus state, an interest in a series of game results in the bonus state will increase interest in the bonus state. Can.

  The BB mode may be upgraded only one step at a time, or multiple steps may be upgraded at one time. When control is performed so that only one step can be upgraded, the degree of expectation during stay in the BB mode with low expectation for winning the transition lottery decreases compared to the case where it is possible to upgrade multiple steps at once. Since it is easy to upgrade from the mode, it becomes easy to create a game form in which the gaming state is gradually upgraded.

  In Pachi-Slot 1, if a JAC 2 system replay or a JAC 3 system replay is determined as an internal winning combination during the bonus state, it is treated as "Chanlip" according to the type of carryover carried forward as an internal winning combination. There are cases and cases where they are treated as replay (see FIG. 96). Then, the BB mode is upgraded in the case of handling as "Chanlipu", and the BB mode is not upgraded in the case of treating as "Replay". This makes it possible to diversify the game in the bonus state and to enhance the interest in the bonus state.

<Start control of enemy determination ART after the end of bonus>
Also, in Pachi-Slot 1, if you decide (carried over) the role associated with JACIN as an internal winning combination during the bonus state, it shifts to the high RT state (RT4 gaming state), and a combination of symbols according to the role associated with JACIN And transition to the low RT state (RT2 gaming state). This RT state is maintained even after the bonus state ends, so if the bonus state ends in the low RT state, the RT state will be low even in the bonus non-winning state.

  From the player's point of view, a player who has little knowledge about the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to perform stop operation while avoiding the display of the combination of symbols according to the combination according to JACIN. It is not always possible to perform the stop operation, and the player may be disadvantaged. Here, when the RT is in a low RT state, control is often performed to prepare the ART without executing the ART, and if the state in preparation continues, the player is likely to be dissatisfied and the interest is reduced. Not only that, but also the time efficiency is reduced by the period of preparation. The disadvantage to the player may be, for example, such a decrease in interest during preparation and a decrease in time efficiency.

  In this respect, in Pachi-Slo 1, when the bonus state ends while winning the ART, regardless of the type of the RT gaming state, the ART (more specifically AT) is executed and the disadvantage received by the player is reduced. Do. Specifically, Pachislot 1 has an enemy determination ART and a battle ART as an ART gaming state, and determines continuation of the ART gaming state in a battle ART performed after the enemy determination ART, and during the enemy determination ART, it is ally As in the increase of the HP of the character, the game is performed to increase the expectation for continuation of the ART gaming state. Therefore, even if the ART is executed in the low RT state after the end of the bonus state, the enemy determination ART, which is a chance section for increasing the continuation expectation, can be executed first, so a monotonous game such as in preparation It is possible to alleviate the decline (unfavorable) of interest without becoming In addition, since no preparation period is provided in the first place, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that the player receives without a decrease in time efficiency.

<Effect by the enemy determination ART>
In pachislot 1, a boss ball is set in an apocalypse during enemy determination ART, and an enemy character to be played in battle ART is determined according to the type of boss ball set at the push order bell winning. Then, during the battle ART, the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character and the decrease amount of the HP of the enemy character are varied according to the type of the enemy character. As a result, the result of the game in the hostile ART will affect the presence or absence of continuation of the ART gaming state, so that the interest of the player for the continuation of the ART gaming state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

  Also, in Pachi-Slot 1, since both the attack power and the defense power are set for the enemy character, both the HP reduction amount of the ally character and the HP reduction amount of the enemy character are individually set for each enemy character. It can be set. As a result, it is possible to employ various types of enemy characters such as an enemy character having both high attack power and defense power, an enemy character having only one high character, and an enemy character having low both characters. The game in battle ART can be diversified according to the result of the game of.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, the speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency with which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. Thereby, the game in the battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game in the enemy determination ART.

  Also, in Pachislot 1, HP of friend characters is added during enemy determination ART. This makes it easy to avoid that the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 during the battle ART when a lot of additions are performed, and the expectation for the continuation of the ART gaming state increases. Become. As a result, since not only the game in the battle ART but also the game in the enemy determination ART affects the continuation of the ART gaming state, the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state may be played a plurality of times. Can last for a long time.

  In Pachislot 1, when the HP of the ally character is less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the ally character is set to the initial value. This makes it possible to prevent the HP of the ally character from becoming 0 immediately during the battle ART, as the HP of the ally character is at least the initial value or more in the subsequent battle ART. As a result, the continued ART advantageous state is immediately obtained. It is possible to prevent the termination.

  Further, in Pachi-Slo 1, the HP addition of the ally character in the enemy determination ART is performed according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, for example, when the role of Rea is determined to be an internal winning combination, the amount of addition can be increased, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the hostile ART without causing waste of the role of Rea. Can.

  Also, in Pachi-Slot 1, if the role of Rea is decided as an internal winning combination during enemy determination ART, stock lottery of ally balls is performed, and boss balls set in the apocalypse when smashed for stock lottery are ally balls rewrite. The enemy determination ART ends at the bell winning in the game in which the boss ball is set in the apocalypse area 113A, so that by replacing the boss ball with the ally ball, not only continuation of the enemy determination ART can be expected, Since an increase in the HP of the ally character triggered by the ally ball can also be expected, as a result, the continuation expectation of the battle ART also rises. In this case, the battle ART can be more easily continued by removing the boss balls 7 and 8 whose continuation of the battle ART is determined from the boss ball to be rewritten, which is preferable.

  Also, in the pachislot 1, during enemy determination ART, whenever a production ball to be set in the apocalypse is decided, boss MAP (lottery information) defining boss MAP data for deciding the production ball is updated. In Pachislot 1, this boss MAP is provided with a ceiling function, and when reaching the ceiling boss MAP, the boss balls 7, 8 whose continuation of the battle ART is determined, or the HP of the ally character is increased. Only the ally balls are decided as the production balls set in the apocalypse. From the player's point of view, if the hostile ART continues for a long time, only boss balls 7, 8 or allied balls will be set in the apocalypse, so it is interesting to play the current boss MAP as well. And the interest of the game during the hostile ART is improved.

<Effect by battle ART>
In the pachislot 1, an enemy ball or an ally ball is set in the apocalypse during the battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or the ally character is decreased depending on the kind of the effect ball set at the pushing order bell. When the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the ART is continued, and when the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 first, the ART is ended. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the player's start operation, the player will actively participate in the game in the battle ART, and the motivation to the game can be improved. .

  Moreover, the object which reduces HP according to pushing order bell differs according to the presentation ball set to the apocalypse. Here, since the effect balls up to a plurality of destination games are set in the apocalypse, the player can play the game after grasping the set effect balls, which is an advantageous timing for the player side You will want to win the order bell by pushing. As a result, the effect balls and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can be made to play a game with a sense of tension, so the interest in the battle ART can be improved.

  In addition, since the pushing parter who reduces the HP is a winning combination for notification in the battle ART, that the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART It will be. For example, depending on the gaming machine, a winning combination that reduces the HP of the teammate character may be replayed, and a winning combination that reduces the HP of the enemy character may be a push bell. However, in such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of a winning combination affecting profit is directly linked to the continuation of ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, like Pachislot 1, the playability in Battle ART is diversified by making the winning bells of pushing order that affect profits be advantageous / disadvantageous according to the set balls. It is possible to enhance the interest during battle ART.

  In the case of winning the so-called rare role, the pachislot 1 reduces the HP of the enemy character regardless of the set effect ball. In this way, it is possible to prevent a waste of the rare role, and the player expects that the rare role will be determined as an internal winning combination during the battle ART, thereby enhancing the interest in the battle ART. Can.

  Also, in Pachislot 1, if four enemy balls are set in succession during the battle ART, then always set the ally balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation which is disadvantageous for the player from being sustained for a long time, so that the player can play the game during the battle ART at ease.

<Sound when ART continuity is confirmed>
In addition, when the continuation of the ART is determined, the pachislot 1 notifies the player that the ART is to be continued by outputting a dedicated sound. At this time, since the player may not be able to grasp the change only by changing the song in the ART, the pachislot 1 outputs a sound effect (siren) which is output only when the ART continues before the change of the song. . As a result, in the pachislot machine 1, the player can easily recognize that the ART is to be continued.

<Feature control in ART>
In Pachi-Slot 1, during ART, by driving the rotating object 200 in various manners, a special effect during ART is performed to stimulate the game during ART. In this case, when the player leaves the seat during ART, the pachislot 1 stops driving the rotary object 200 and returns the movable portion of the rotary object 200 to the initial position (for example, the cover member 198 is closed). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of the rotating character 200 while exciting the game in the ART using the rotating character 200, and as a result, it is possible to extend the life of the gaming machine.

<Switching of production>
In pachislot 1, effects in pachislot 1 are classified and set into layer switching type effects and effect switching type effects, game progress such as stop operation, and operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, chance button) The production is switched on the occasion of etc. The layer switching type effect is suitable for suppressing the flickering of the image, and flickering is easily generated before and after switching, by setting an effect that gives the player an unpleasant feeling as the layer switching type effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect of the effect switching type can be reduced in processing load, it is possible to prevent the processing omission from occurring according to the switching of the effect.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the player is urged to perform an operation unrelated to the progress of the game such as the chance button, and the effect to be switched is made different depending on whether or not the instructed predetermined operation is performed. As a result, the game characteristics are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved. Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effects can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

<Panel control when recalling non-effect image>
In the pachi slot 1, a so-called illumination array (panel device 400) can be provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 to achieve a high rendering effect by linking the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the display of the panel device 400. At this time, when a non-effect image such as a menu screen or an error screen is called in the liquid crystal display device 11 during effect display on the panel device 400, the effect display on the panel device 400 is covered by the non-effect image, and the non-effect image is viewed The sex is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, when a call to a non-effect image is made during effect in the panel device 400, the final output of the LED 403 that causes the panel device 400 to emit light is suppressed to produce an effect in the panel device 400 as a non-effect image. Prevent the display from being overwhelmed. As described above, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed, and processing such as error processing is not added to the execution processing itself of the effect data, the processing at the time of calling of the non-effect image can be simplified and The occurrence can be reduced.

  In addition, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and the light emission animation of the LED 403 is continued internally, when the display of the non-effect image is finished, the effect on the panel device 400 is resumed from the middle . Also in this case, since processing for interrupting and resuming effects in the panel device 400 is not added, the processing can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be reduced.

<Processing in case of sequence error>
The sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot 1 checks whether the order of commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 is normal, and performs a predetermined sequence error process if the order of commands is abnormal. When managing a part of the gaming state on the side of the sub control circuit 101, it is necessary to appropriately acquire various types of information in accordance with the progress of the game on the side of the sub control circuit 101, and some information can not be acquired. , The player may get an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, the pachislot 1 prevents the player from obtaining an unfair advantage by forcibly ending the advantageous state for the player at the occurrence of a sequence error. Specifically, in the case where the secondary control circuit 101 can not know that a bell spill has been displayed in the CZ, the player unfairly obtains the benefit of continuing the CZ. Therefore, the pachislot 1 forcibly terminates the CZ when a sequence error occurs during the CZ, and prevents the player from gaining an unfair advantage due to a wrongdoing.

  In addition, in Pachislot 1, when the secondary control circuit 101 can not know that the bell spill or RT1 shift lip is displayed during the high probability gaming state, the player unfairly gains the benefit of continuing the high probability gaming state. It gets. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, when a sequence error occurs during the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is forcibly ended, and it is prevented that the player gets an unfair advantage due to the wrongdoing.

Second Embodiment
The pachi slot 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, the pachi slot 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the pachislot 1 of the second embodiment, control in the case of transition to the bonus state during the hostile determination ART will be described. Specifically, the management of the effect balls used in the enemy determination ART after the bonus state transferred during the enemy selection ART is finished will be described.

  In the Pachi-Slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the part relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the hostile determination ART, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten to new effect balls. Here, the effect balls to be rewritten may be all or a part of the six effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103. When only a part of the effect balls is to be rewritten, the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls may be prioritized, and the effect balls to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority. Further, the number of effect balls to be rewritten may be determined by lottery. That is, when the part related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a predetermined lottery may be performed to determine how many of the six rendering balls are to be rewritten.

  In addition, since the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls are advantageous presentation balls for the player, these presentation balls may be maintained without being rewritten. If the boss ball 7, 8 or the ally ball is a non-displayed effect ball (ie, the effect ball stored in the storage area "6" of the sub RAM 103), the player can grasp it. In addition, since the player does not feel dissatisfaction even if the rewriting is performed, the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally ball which are not displayed may be rewritten as new presentation balls.

  A new effect ball can extract the boss MAP and determine it based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Here, as described above, the boss MAP is provided with the ceiling function, and when the boss MAP “52” “53” is updated, only the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls are determined as effect balls thereafter. It will be done. In Pachi-Slo 1 of the second embodiment, when the role relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the hostile determination ART, as the boss MAP for determining a new effect ball is updated to the advantageous boss MAP It is also good.

  That is, in Pachi-Slo 1 of the second embodiment, when the part related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the hostile determination ART, the boss MAP used during the hostile determination ART is updated so as to approach the ceiling. You may do it. Specifically, in the boss MAP which reaches the ceiling when updated to a predetermined value, a mode is conceivable in which a specific value is added to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART. For example, when the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is the boss MAP "30", if the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is added to the boss MAP, and the boss is A new effect ball may be determined based on the MAP “40”.

  Also, as another specific example, instead of adding to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART, when the role relating to the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, the specific boss MAP is updated. You may do it. For example, when the part related to the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, regardless of the boss MAP used during the enemy selection ART, the boss MAP “40” is uniformly set, and a new effect ball is created. May be determined. Of course, without making the specific boss MAP uniform, for example, if the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the first range (for example, boss MAP “0” to “10”), If one specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “20”) is used and the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in a second range (for example, boss MAP “11” to “20”), The second specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “30”) may be used.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when transitioning to the bonus state during the enemy determination ART, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten to new effect balls. That is, in the second embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a profit state rewriting means, and is stored in the sub RAM 103 when the part relating to the bonus (BB) is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART. Rewrite all or part of the six effect balls that are played.
Since the ease of continuation of the ART gaming state is managed based on the presentation balls, the control of the period of the ART gaming state is played by advancing the hostile ART after the end of the bonus based on the new presentation balls. It can be made rich. In this case, by maintaining the advantageous balls for the player such as the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls without rewriting, the player can play the subsequent game with expectation, and the game is Interest will improve.

Third Embodiment
Subsequently, the pachi slot 1 of the third embodiment will be described. In the Pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, a method of determining a rendering ball in the battle ART will be described. Here, in the Pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the effect balls (the ally balls and the enemy balls) are determined in accordance with the types of enemy characters of the opponent in the battle ART (see FIGS. 113 to 115). In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the effect ball is determined in consideration of the remaining HP of the ally character.

  FIG. 156 shows a battle MAP lottery table to be referred to when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less, and FIG. 157 shows that the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5 It is a battle MAP lottery table which is referred to when there is, and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less.

  In the pachislot 1 of the third embodiment, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 21 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 113 is referred to, and the teammate character's If the remaining HP is 20 or less, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 156 is referred to. Similarly, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 11 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to, and the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less. In some cases, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is referred to. The battle MAP lottery table in the case where the other bosses are enemy characters of the opponent is omitted.

  Comparing FIG. 113 with FIG. 156, it can be seen that, even if the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the probability that the battle MAP of the transition destination is extracted varies according to the remaining HP of the ally character. . More specifically, the battle MAP lottery table is referred to when the remaining HP of the ally character shown in FIG. 156 is smaller than the battle MAP lottery table referred to when the remaining HP of the ally character shown in FIG. 113 is large. The probability of “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27” and “28” being determined as the battle map of the transfer destination is high.

  As described above, the battle MAPs “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27” and “28” are battle MAPs in which allied balls or awakening balls are always extracted as effect balls. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the attack frequency of the teammate character increases as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases. Incidentally, comparing FIG. 115 with FIG. 157, similarly, even when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5, the attack frequency of the ally character increases as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, comparing FIG. 156 with FIG. 157, the rate of increase in attack frequency of the ally character and the remaining HP of the ally character that is the trigger for the increase in attack frequency of the ally character differ depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent.

  For example, referring to the source battle map “1” where the opponent's enemy character is boss 1, the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always drawn out is about 60% ̃ according to the remaining HP of the ally character It has risen to about 80%. On the other hand, with reference to the transition source battle map “1” in which the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5, the battle map in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always drawn is approximately 22% ̃ according to the remaining HP of the ally character. It has risen to about 48%. Therefore, it can be understood that the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 156, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less, as shown in FIG. When the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less. Therefore, it can be seen that the remaining HP of the ally character, which is a trigger for the increase in the attack frequency of the ally character, differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. That is, in the third embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 configures the probability changing means, and the HP of the teammate character is less than the change threshold (for example, when the opponent character of the opponent is the boss 1, HP “20” or less, When it is the boss 5, when it becomes HP “10” or less), it changes the MAP lottery and changes the frequency at which the teammate character attacks.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1 of the third embodiment, the attack frequency of the ally character can be increased as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases, so that effects such as reversal from the pinch become possible, and the game during the battle ART is performed. It can be made to sweat. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability of whether or not the ART gaming state continues, and the interest of the gaming in the ART gaming state is improved.

  Further, the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the ally character and the remaining HP of the ally character causing the increase in the attack frequency of the ally character are different depending on the type of the enemy character, so that the ART gaming state continues. It is possible to further diversify the sex and to improve the interest of the ART gaming state game.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the number of times the attack frequency of the teammate character is increased is only once, in other words, the remaining HP of the teammate character causing the attack frequency of the teammate character to increase. Although only one setting is made, it is not limited to this. Specifically, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased by one level when the HP of the ally character is less than the first value, and the attack frequency of the ally character is increased when the HP of the ally character is less than the second value less than the first value. The attack frequency of the teammate character may be increased a plurality of times, such as one more step up.

  In this case, the number of times to increase the attack frequency of the teammate character may be made different depending on the type of the enemy character. By doing this, for example, the enemy character whose attack frequency is increased little by little as the HP of the ally character decreases, or the enemy whose attack frequency rapidly rises when the HP of the ally character becomes small. A character can be created, and as a result, the playability of whether or not the ART gaming state continues can be further diversified, and the amusement of the ART gaming state game is improved.

Fourth Embodiment
Subsequently, a pachi slot 1 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, an effect control method at the end of the bonus state will be described. In the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, the effect for the bonus end time is set at the start of the game when the bonus state may end, and the bonus ends when the bonus state is actually ended as a result of the game. While the effect for time is executed, when the bonus state is not ended, the effect for bonus end time is rewritten to the effect for bonus continuation, and the effect for bonus continuation is executed.

  FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing a flow of ART lottery processing in BB executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the ART lottery processing in BB executed by the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 145). . The during-ART ART lottery process shown in FIG. 158 is performed when the start command is received in the bonus state (see S431 in FIG. 139).

  Comparing the ART lottery process in BB of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 145 with the ART lottery process in BB of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 158, S601 to S604 of ART lottery process in BB of the fourth embodiment Since the process is the same as the process of S501 to S504 of the ART lottery process of the first embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 158, following the processing of S604, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is “9” or less (S605). If the value of the bonus end number counter is “9” or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently registers the effect at the end of the bonus, and ends the ART lottery process during BB. On the contrary, if the value of the bonus end number counter is not equal to or less than "9" (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery processing during BB. Note that the bonus end effect is an effect to be performed at the end of the current game, for example, a screen notifying the number of medals paid out during the bonus state, and a result of ART lottery performed during the bonus state. It is an effect to be displayed.

  Here, in Pachi-Slot 1, since the maximum payout number per game in the bonus state is 10, if the value of the bonus end number counter is "9" or less, there is a possibility that the bonus state will end. is there. The processes of S604 and S605 are processes for registering effects for the bonus end time at the start of the game where the bonus state may end. The bonus end number counter may be independently managed on the sub side, or information managed on the main side (see FIG. 124) may be acquired through various commands.

  Subsequently, FIG. 159 is a flow of a winning operation command reception process executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 149) executed by the pachislot 1 according to the first embodiment. Is a flowchart showing The processing at the time of prize operation command reception shown in FIG. 159 is performed when the command received from the main side is a prize operation command (see S408 in FIG. 138).

  Comparing the winning operation command reception process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 149 with the winning operation command reception process of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 159, S611 of the winning operation command reception process of the fourth embodiment. The processing of ~ S618 is the same as the processing of S541 ~ S548 of the processing at the time of prize operation reception of the first embodiment, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 159, following the processing of S618, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not BB is in progress (S619). If it is during BB (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes a BB during effect control process described later at S160 (S620), and ends the winning operation command reception process. On the other hand, if the BB is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the winning operation command reception process.

  Subsequently, FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a flow of BB during-effect control processing executed by the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment. The during BB effect control process shown in FIG. 160 is performed when a winning operation command is received in the bonus state (see S620 in FIG. 159).

  As shown in FIG. 160, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus end effect is registered (S631). If the bonus end effect is not registered (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the during BB effect control process.

  On the other hand, when the bonus end effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S632). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes the registered effect (effect at the end of the bonus) (S634), and the BB internal effect control process Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (NO), the sub CPU 102 rewrites the registered bonus end presentation effect to the bonus continuation presentation (S633), and then rewrites the bonus The continuation effect is executed (S634), and the during BB effect control process is ended.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, at the start of a game that may end the bonus state, effects for the bonus end are set once, while based on the result of the game, Change the effect to be executed at the end of the game. This makes it possible to prevent the effect at the end from being executed even though the bonus state is not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the end time of the bonus state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes effect control means, and sets effects for the bonus end time at the start of the game where there is a possibility that the bonus state may end, and the game result (bonus end Based on the value of the number counter), it is controlled whether the bonus end effect set at the start of the game is executed or the bonus continued effect is executed by rewriting to the bonus continued effect.

  Further, even when the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state is diversified, the end time of the bonus state can be appropriately notified, which is preferable. That is, depending on the gaming machine, the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state may be fixed. In such a gaming machine, since the timing at which the bonus state ends is also fixed, although the effect at the end is not mistakenly performed, the game in the bonus state becomes monotonous.

  In this respect, in the pachislot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state differs depending on the result of the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game during the bonus state from becoming monotonous. The end time of the state can be appropriately notified.

[Modification]
As mentioned above, although the pachi slot 1 which concerns on this embodiment was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this.

  In the pachislo of the above embodiment, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, it is set on condition that the internal winning combination is "Bell winning" or more, or the combination of displayed symbols is "Bell winning" or more. It is decided to carry out lottery based on the production balls. In this respect, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, lottery based on the effect ball may be performed regardless of the internal winning combination or the combination of the displayed symbols. In such pachislot machines, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting blanks (empty) in the apocalypse.

  In the pachislot of the above embodiment, the secondary control circuit 101 manages the transition control to an advantageous state (for example, "ART state"), manages the duration of the advantageous state, and notifies (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed in the main control circuit 91.

  Note that, as the transition control to the advantageous state, for example, control (transition lottery) regarding transitioning to / not transitioning to the advantageous state can be mentioned. Further, for example, in the case of a pachislot 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the transition to the advantageous state, control regarding the transition between the states can also be included in the transition control to the advantageous state.

  The management of the duration of the advantageous state is, in the case of the above embodiment, control for increasing or decreasing the HP of the enemy character and the allied character, and in the case of other pachislots, for example, the number of initial games in the advantageous state. There is a decision, additional control of the number of AT games. Also, for example, in the case of the pachislot 1 where the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, the lottery of whether or not to continue can also be included in the management of the duration of the advantageous state.

  As the duration of the advantageous state, the number of unit games in the advantageous state, the number of times of notifying information advantageous to the player during the advantageous state, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state according to the specification of the gaming machine An arbitrary period such as the number of sets when the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is one set can be included.

  At this time, as the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state, a net increase number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game may be used. Also, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on the medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on the actual value), and whether or not the number actually increased. It is also possible to calculate based on the number of medals scheduled to be increased when following the navigation (calculation based on an ideal value). Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, with regard to a part combination having a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or a combination in which display / non-display of a combination of symbols is switched according to the timing of stop operation, the combination is determined as an internal combination winning combination Also, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

  Further, management of notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state includes control for notifying a mode of stop operation advantageous for the player by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like.

  In addition, as an aspect of the stop operation to notify the player, the order (pushing order) of the stop operation may be displayed in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed, and the combination of the symbols is displayed. It may be the timing (pattern to be aimed) of the stop operation necessary for

  Further, as an advantageous state, the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player without changing the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay (or changing it in a range which does not affect the playability) It is also possible to use a so-called "AT" to notify, and to activate the replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay becomes high, and the stop operation advantageous for the player It is also possible to use a so-called "ART" which reports the aspect of

  Further, in the pachislots of the above-described embodiment or the above-described various modifications, an effect determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91, that is, one or more effects for one internal winning combination. To do. In this regard, a display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the display corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in one-to-one correspondence may be performed on the above-described 7-segment display 28 or a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination. The display of the internal winning combination is preferably performed under the control of the main control circuit 91. As the main control circuit 91 itself notifies the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 in this manner, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fairness is secured.

[Supplementary Note 1]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, since the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, the player is required to continue the AT. It is hoped that the number of navi games will increase.

  Also, in recent years, in a high probability re-gaming state (RT), the probability of being able to play a game (re-playing) without internal medals being determined as an internal winning combination with high probability is triggered by a predetermined condition. Also known are gaming machines that operate. For example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-204875) discloses a gaming machine that activates a high probability re-playing state when the bonus state is over.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine of the patent document, since the high probability re-playing state is activated after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play a game without reducing the medals after the end of the bonus, but the high probability re-playing state always occurs after the bonus , There is a risk that the game during the bonus becomes monotonous. Therefore, in the gaming machine which operates the high probability re-playing state after the end of the bonus, there is a demand for a mechanism that the game during the bonus does not become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game in the special gaming state.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels) , The display window 4), start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means The symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for changing the symbol by causing the game to be played, the normal state, and the special gaming state (for example, the bonus) which is a game state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state. Internal lottery table provided corresponding to a plurality of gaming states including state), and switching means (for example, main control) for switching the gaming state triggered by a predetermined condition Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from among a plurality of winning combinations by referring to the internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state based on the detection of the starting operation by the path 91) and the starting operation detecting means (For example, main control circuit 91), stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning The variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the symbol and the reel stop control means, the symbol display means Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the selected effective line , And the internal lottery table provided corresponding to the special gaming state is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, and is won by the prize determining means during the special gaming state Any one of a plurality of carryovers (for example, F_JACIN 1 to 3) that can be carried over as an internal winning combination can be determined as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the internal winning combination has been determined. When the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN1) is carried over as an internal winning combination, the predetermined combination (for example, F_J1) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the upper row 7 lip to the F_J1 cross 7 lip is determined as an internal winning combination, a bonus (for example, winning of a transition lottery of ART) is awarded, and a second carryover combination different from the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN 2) A feature providing means (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) is provided, which does not give the benefit when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the internal winning combination is carried over.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry any one of a plurality of carryover roles as an internal winning combination during the special game state. Then, the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, grants a benefit when carrying over the first carryover role and does not give a benefit when carrying over the second carryover role. . As a result, even when the predetermined winning combination is won internally, whether or not the benefit is given can be differentiated depending on the type of the carryover combination, so that the game in the special gaming state can be diversified. , Can enhance the interest of the game during the special game state.

[Supplementary Note 2]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  By the way, in the gaming machine provided with the ART function, even if the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, the operation of the high probability replay state may be performed by the stop operation of the player. In this regard, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-233721), when the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, the player is not notified of the advantageous information for the player during the high probability replay state, and the high It is described that control to fall to a normal state from probability re-playing state is performed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, the control to fall from the high probability re-gaming state to the normal state when the transition to the advantageous state is not determined is used as a so-called penalty, accidentally by the player's stop operation, the high probability re-gaming state It was common not to do the shift lottery to the advantageous state when the operation of the.

  However, in spite of the fact that the gaming state is high probability re-gaming state, if transition lottery to the advantageous state is not performed, the high probability re-gaming state in which the benefit is not provided (for example, RT during ART non winning) It is lacking in the fun of

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which improves the interest of a game to which a privilege is not given.

[Means for Solving the Problems]

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a probability that the probability that the replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) and the replay is determined as an internal winning combination A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of displayed symbols; and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by a player A symbol variation unit (for example, main control circuit 91, steppi) that causes the symbol to be varied by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit The first symbol combination (for example, RT4 transition lip) or the second symbol according to the order of the stop operation when determined as the internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start motor detection means and the start operation detection means A third symbol combination (for example, according to the order of the stop operation when the combination (for example, RT1 transition ripple) can be stopped and displayed and determined as the first push order (for example, push sequence lip) and the internal winning combination. , A bell spilled eye) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed at the time of pressing correct) among a plurality of combinations including a second pressing order (for example, pressing order bell) that can be stopped and displayed And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel Operation detection The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stage (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stopping operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. Based on the fact that the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means and the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped by the reel stop control means Judgment means (for example, main control circuit 91) for judging the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means, and during the normal state, according to the first pushing order by the judgment means When it is determined that the first symbol combination of the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination is stopped, the game is played from the normal state to the high RT state The RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which shifts the state, and the third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination according to the second pushing order by the determination means during the high RT state If it is determined that the third symbol combination of the two has stopped, the gaming state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, and if it is determined that the fourth symbol combination has stopped, the high If an RT ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) maintaining the RT state and a predetermined lottery (for example, a transition lottery to ART) performed during the normal state or the high RT state is performed, an effect state regarding the game Means for transitioning to a specific effect state (for example, ART gaming state) for notifying information of an advantageous stop operation (for example, the sub control circuit 101), and a state where the predetermined lottery is not won When the RT start means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state, the information of the stop operation necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination (when the second push order is determined as the internal winning combination ( For example, notification number determining means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for determining the number of notifications (for example, the number of guarantees) for notifying the pressing order of the correct order to the pressing order bell, and the specific effect state transition means is the specific effect state And, when the first push order is determined to be an internal winning combination during the normal state, the information on the stop operation necessary to stop the first symbol combination is notified and the high The information on the advantageous stop operation is notified during the RT state, and the number-of-notifications determining means is performed when the second push order is determined as the internal winning combination during the high RT state which is not winning for the predetermined lottery. Decided Informing means for informing information advantageous stop operation only serial notice frequency (e.g., sub-control circuit 101, a liquid crystal display device 11) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the high RT state has a normal state in which the probability that replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and a high RT state in which the probability that replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high. By notifying information of the stop operation which is advantageous in the specific effect state in, it is possible to realize a game state (so-called ART) which is advantageous for the player. Here, since the transition to the specific effect state is performed not only by the predetermined lottery performed in the normal state, but also by the predetermined lottery performed in the high RT state, the predetermined lottery is performed. Even in the case of transition to the high RT state in the absence state, the transition to the specific effect state can be expected thereafter. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, a high RT state not winning a predetermined lottery can be made a transition chance segment to an advantageous gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is given. None can enhance the interest during high RT conditions (not winning a given lottery).

  Further, since the predetermined lottery is performed in the high RT state, the strategicity for the stop operation in the normal state is increased, and the interest in the normal state can be enhanced. That is, as in the conventional gaming machine, in the game characteristic that imposes a penalty during the high RT state in which no benefit is given, the stop operation in the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation so as not to receive the penalty). It must be done for the left reel, etc.). In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state, and the normal state is performed. Not only the playability but also the operability can be enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second pressing order is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state. Transitioning to a high RT state without winning a lottery, for example, the information of advantageous stop operation (for example, it is necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second push order is determined as an internal winning combination Information of the stop operation) is notified a predetermined number of times. Thereby, when the player's stop operation accidentally shifts to the high RT state, the high RT state does not immediately shift to the normal state, and a predetermined lottery is received with a high probability of replay win. be able to.

[Supplementary Note 3]
Pachislot 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  By the way, in a gaming machine equipped with an ART function, a chance zone having a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is made to shift to the ART state with high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internal A gaming machine is disclosed that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the gaming machines of such patent documents, the interest of the player in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, since whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of internal lottery, depending on the player, there is a chance that the particular symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May not be obtained even once, or the possibility of the possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, for the player, even though the player has moved to the chance zone, no chance will be obtained, which may lower the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for transition to an advantageous state for the player. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Determined as an internal winning combination based on symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91, stepping motor) that fluctuates and detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Pushing order that can be stopped and displayed for the first symbol combination (for example, the combination of symbols displayed when pressing order is correct) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) according to the order of stop operation when being pressed Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a combination (for example, pushing order bell), and provided corresponding to the plurality of reels Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means Reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 9) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the symbol is detected And the internal winning combination determination means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means Winning state determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines whether or not the internal winning combination has won, and transition lottery of whether or not to shift to the above-mentioned advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition The lottery state start means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which starts the state (for example, CZ), and the push combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means in the advantageous state lottery condition. A first transition lottery (for example, a transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) is performed to determine transition to an advantageous state with a predetermined probability, and a predetermined number of singles are selected in the advantageous state lottery state. Means of advantageous state lottery means (eg, for example, the second transition lottery (for example, transition lottery to ART performed at CZ completion) which decides to shift to the advantageous state with a specific probability when a place game (for example, 30 games) has elapsed When the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the sub-control circuit 101) and the unit game in which the first transition lottery has been performed, the first transition regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state Lottery result management means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for maintaining the lottery result of the first transition lottery, when the lottery is invalidated and the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game The first transition lottery is performed in the advantageous state lottery state, and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained by the lottery result management means, or the predetermined number of When the second game has passed, it is decided to shift to the advantageous state by lottery state end means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which ends the advantageous state lottery state and the first transition lottery or the second transition lottery. And an advantageous state transition unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for shifting a state in which a game is played to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state transition unit causes the second transition lottery to shift to the advantageous state. Is characterized by transitioning to an advantageous state (eg, ART gaming state of more advantageous ART state) more advantageous than when it is determined to be transitioned to the advantageous state by the first transition lottery. I assume.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition to the advantageous state to the player's advantageous state is performed, the first position is triggered by the determination that the pushing advance is made as the internal winning combination. Make a migration lottery. The advantageous state lottery state is ended when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained or a predetermined number of unit games elapse. As described above, in the gaming machine that performs shift lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the first shift lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery status, but the invention relates to the present invention. In the gaming machine, the second transition lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment during the advantageous state lottery state, since the transition to the advantageous state can always be received even if the push service is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state. .

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the pushing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, but the first transition lottery is performed when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation. The result of the first transition lottery is maintained when the second symbol combination is displayed. According to such control, since the player is also interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the pushing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player enters the second symbol because the advantageous state of transition through the second transition lottery is an advantageous state of advantage over the advantageous state of transition through the first transition lottery. It is desired that a predetermined number of unit games pass without the combination being displayed (the first transition lottery being maintained and the advantageous state lottery state being ended), and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state be maintained until the end it can.

[Supplementary Note 4]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  In addition, many devices have been made so far to diversify the transition to an advantageous state (ART). For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-126369), a special part (BB 7) is included in the bonus. A game machine is disclosed that transitions to an advantageous state after the end of the bonus when the game is internally won.

[Summary of the Invention]
[The problem that Ming tries to solve]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the transition to the advantageous state is performed based on one internal lottery result during the predetermined period (during bonus), the game is likely to be monotonous, and an expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state There was a problem that was difficult to hold. In addition, since it is general that the specific part that triggers the transition to the advantageous state has a low winning probability, it can not have the expectation of winning in a predetermined period, and the transition to the advantageous state There is also a risk of losing the interest of the game for a predetermined period.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for transition to an advantageous state for the player. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines the internal winning combination by probability and stop operation detection means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel Stopping rotation of the reel based on (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by the symbol display, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won. An advantageous state lottery state (for example, a bonus) that performs transition lottery whether to shift to the above-mentioned advantageous state triggered by a predetermined winning condition determination unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined condition (for example, operation of BB) Gaming state control means (e.g., main control circuit 91) which ends the advantageous state lottery state in response to a specific condition (e.g., that 59 medals are paid out) in the advantageous state lottery state; And the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous state when the gaming state control means ends the advantageous state lottery state; And an advantageous state start unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for shifting the game playing state to the advantageous state when winning a lottery, the advantageous state lottery state being A first lottery state (eg BB mode 0) having the lowest probability of winning the transition lottery by the advantageous state lottery means, a second lottery state (eg BB mode 1) in which the probability is higher than the first lottery state And a plurality of lottery states (e.g., BB mode) including a third lottery state (e.g., BB mode 2) in which the probability is higher than the first lottery state and the second lottery state; It further comprises lottery state transition means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for transitioning a plurality of the lottery states based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the state lottery state, and the lottery state transition means When it is determined in the first lottery state as an internal winning combination of any one of the first number of the combination including the first combination and the second combination of the plurality of combinations, the second Lottery letter Transitioning the lottery state to any of the second number which is smaller than the first number including the first combination of the plurality of combinations in the second collection condition and not including the second combination. The gaming machine characterized by transitioning the lottery state from the second lottery state to the third lottery state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition lottery of whether to shift to the advantageous state at the end of the advantageous state lottery state is performed. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state and a third lottery state, which have different probability of winning a transition lottery, and the inside during the advantageous state lottery state. A plurality of lottery states are transitioned based on the winning combination. As a result, since the probability of winning the transition lottery can be changed based on the internal winning combination, the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the advantageous state lottery state, which is advantageous. The state can be enhanced during the lottery state.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, from the first lottery state to the second lottery state where the probability of winning the transition lottery is higher, any one of the internal winnings of the first number of roles including the first and second roles. A second number less than the first number that includes the first combination and does not include the second combination, transits to be determined as the combination, and the third lottery state has a higher probability of winning the transition lottery from the second lottery state Transition is made when one of internal winning combinations is determined as internal winning combination. As a result, although the type of role that triggers the transition to the higher lottery state decreases as the lottery state transitions, the probability of winning the transition lottery along with the transition of the lottery state is also increased. A game form in which the state is gradually upgraded can be created. From the player's point of view, the player is not interested in a single internal lottery result in the advantageous state lottery state, but has an interest in a series of internal lottery results in the advantageous state lottery state. It can enhance the interest during the lottery status.

[Supplementary Note 5]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  By the way, since the game in the advantageous state tends to be monotonous, in recent years, attempts to diversify the game property in the advantageous state are widely performed. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-152165), a free game is played when a predetermined condition is established, and the number of fighter symbols displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on the liquid crystal display A gaming machine has been disclosed in which diversity is given to the effect and the payout form by using the remaining number of fighter planes on the player side of the shooting game which is effect-displayed above.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since free games and effects (shooting games) are configured to automatically proceed under control of the gaming machine side, the progress of the game by the player can not be reflected in the effect contents. , The player could not actively participate in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in an advantageous state by causing a player to actively participate in a game. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART gaming state) which is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state. A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels The reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the window 4), the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the start operation detection means. A plurality of symbols based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means and the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) which changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among the above, and is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, and detects the stop operation for stopping each reel Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation and the fluctuation of the symbol are stopped by the reel stop control means The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol displaying means. In the winning condition determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines whether or not it is, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which starts the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition Informing means for notifying information of stop operation (for example, information for displaying a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts) which is advantageous for the player when a predetermined combination (for example, pushing order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination (For example, the sub control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11), and prior to the start of the advantageous state, first numerical information (for example, HP of friend character) and second numerical information (for example, HP of enemy character) The numerical value determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to determine and the effect information (for example, a presentation) in a plurality of games from the current (For example, the sub control circuit 101) to register (for example, set in the apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11), and the first effect information (for example, the enemy ball) as the effect information When the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which a character is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and second effect information (for example, an alligator ball) as the effect information Numerical value updating means (for example, secondary control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical value information when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which a character is registered Advantage state control means (e.g., a new one) which ends the advantageous state when the first numerical information falls below a threshold as a result of subtraction, and newly starts the advantageous state when the second numerical information falls below the threshold A control circuit 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, during the advantageous state, the first numerical information and the second numerical information are subtracted based on the presentation information and the internal winning combination, and the second numerical information is less than the threshold. If the numerical information can be reduced below the threshold, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the player's start operation, the player can actively participate in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation to the game can be improved. .

  Further, even when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the target to be subtracted (the first numerical information or the second numerical information) differs according to the effect information registered in the game. For the player, since the first numerical information is subtracted in the state where the first effect information is registered, the player does not want to win a predetermined combination, but the second effect information is registered. Would like to win the prize of the designated role. Here, since the effect information is registered for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the effect information registered in advance, It is desirable for the player to win a predetermined part at a timing advantageous to the player (the second effect information is registered). As a result, the registered effect information and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play a game with a sense of tension, so that the interest in the advantageous state can be improved. it can.

  In addition, since the predetermined combination for subtracting the first numerical information or the second numerical information is the combination of the notification target, that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the advantageous state. It will be given. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the role to which the first numerical information is to be subtracted may be the first role (such as replay) that does not affect profits, and the role to which the second numerical information may be subtracted may affect the profits. It is also conceivable to use two roles (such as a bell). In such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning of the second part affecting the profit is directly linked to the continuation of the advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by making the winning of the predetermined role affecting the profit advantageous / unfavorable in accordance with the registered presentation information, the game characteristic in the advantageous state is achieved. It can be diversified and can enhance the interest during the advantageous state.

[Supplementary Note 6]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to shift the gaming state based on winning or winning of a so-called rare role such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when Cherry 1, 2 and 3 are determined as internal winning combinations are displayed during a predetermined period. It is disclosed that the game state is shifted to the game state advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the player's start operation, the player's operation is reflected in the game result by shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document It is possible to realize the playability in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since so-called rares such as watermelon and cherry have a low probability of winning, when transitioning the gaming state according to the presence or absence of the winnings of the rare as in the case of the gaming machine of the patent document, some players There is also a possibility that a chance can not be obtained, which may reduce the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, although it is possible to consider the game characteristic to shift the gaming state regardless of the player's operation, in such a gaming machine, apart from the original game characteristic of the pachislot machine that advances the game according to the player's operation Since the decision to affect the benefit to be given will be made, there is a possibility that it lacks the suitability as a pachislot machine and may damage the fairness of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting a gaming state rich in gaming characteristics while associating it with the result of the gaming.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is compared with a normal state (for example, normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, ART gaming state) advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state as a state for playing a game. Game machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) having a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the screen, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player Symbol fluctuation means (for example, main control circuit 91, steppin) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means The first symbol combination (for example, the symbol displayed at the time of pressing order correct) according to the order of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the motor) and the start operation detection means Combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, combination of symbols displayed at the time of pressing order incorrect) with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a pressing order that can be stopped and displayed (for example, pressing order bell) Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the internal winning combination, and stop operation detection means (for example, for detecting the stop operation for stopping each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels) , The main control circuit 91), the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by causing the symbol display means, and the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, Winning determining means (for example, main control) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means When a predetermined condition (for example, winning the apocalypse lottery) is satisfied in the normal state, the circuit 91) starts the CZ lottery state (for example, the normal gaming state in the apocalypse operation) in which the transition lottery to the chance zone is performed. In the lottery state start means (for example, the sub control circuit 101), during the CZ lottery state, effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead The effect information registration unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for registering (for example, lottery balls 1 to 4 and effect balls such as fixed balls) and the above-mentioned effective line in the game in which the effect information is registered. When a symbol combination of 1 is displayed, CZ lottery means (for example, secondary control circuit 101, reel of FIG. 72) which performs transition lottery to the chance zone with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game A game state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for shifting the game state to the chance zone based on the stop ART drawing table) and the result of the transition drawing of the CZ drawing means, and the CZ drawing state A lottery state end means (eg, a sub control cycle) which terminates the CZ lottery state when the push order is determined a predetermined number of times as an internal winning combination (for example, when the number of guarantees becomes 0) 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on the effect information registered in advance for the predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, since the effect information is registered regardless of the player's operation, if the gaming state is simply shifted based on the effect information, the aptitude as a gaming machine is lost, and the fairness of the game is impaired. There is a risk of In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is shifted in consideration of not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of the symbols displayed in the game. As a result, the player's operation can be made to intervene in the transition of the gaming state, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  Here, since the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the gaming state is a combination of symbols displayed when the pressing order is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition of the above-mentioned rare role to the gaming state It is possible to give the player more opportunities to have a sense of anticipation regarding the transition of the gaming state than in the case of using it as an opportunity. That is, in the first symbol combination that requires not only winning as an internal winning combination but also the order of stop operations, the winning probability can be set higher than the rare combination, and thus an opportunity to have a sense of expectation It is possible to give a large number of contenders as internal winning combinations, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the transition lottery of the gaming state is performed with the probability according to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed, While associating with the result of the accompanying game, the transition of the game state can be performed in various manners. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to shift the gaming state in a manner rich in gaming characteristics while associating it with the result of the gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state is ended when the pushing combination is determined as the internal winning combination a predetermined number of times during the CZ lottery state. As described above, by using the pushing bonus that triggers the transition of the gaming state as the termination condition of the CZ lottery state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery while in the CZ lottery state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a situation where there is no opportunity to receive the transition lottery, and to prevent the amusement of the game from being reduced.

[Supplementary Note 7]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  By the way, in a gaming machine equipped with an ART function, a chance zone having a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is made to shift to the ART state with high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internal A gaming machine is disclosed that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the gaming machines of such patent documents, the interest of the player in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, since whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of internal lottery, depending on the player, there is a chance that the particular symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May not be obtained even once, or the possibility of the possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, for the player, even though the player has moved to the chance zone, no chance will be obtained, which may lower the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for transition to an advantageous state for the player. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for changing the predetermined value from among the plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination by rate, and stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel Stopping rotation of the reel based on (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by the symbol display, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won Start of an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) to perform a transition lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition as a trigger for determining the winning condition (for example, the main control circuit 91) Means (e.g., sub control circuit 101) and a winning mode (e.g., CZ mode) that defines the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous state in the transition lottery, in a unit game having progressed in the advantageous state lottery state When a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination by the mode transition unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to be shifted based on the number of times and the internal winning combination determination unit in the advantageous state lottery state An advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for performing the transition lottery based on the current winning mode, and the advantageous state lottery means When the transition lottery is performed, a game is performed when it is determined that the transition to the advantageous state is made by the transition lottery, and lottery state end means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state Advantageous state transition means (e.g., the sub control circuit 101) for transitioning the state to the advantageous state, the mode transition means having the probability based on the number of unit games elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state The unit game of which transition is made from the lowest first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) to the second mode (for example, CZ mode 1) in which the probability is higher than that of the first mode and elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the mode is shifted to the third mode (for example, CZ mode 2) in which the probability is the highest, and the lottery state start means When the pay-off state is started, transition mode determination means (for example, CZ_MAP, sub control circuit 101) for determining the number of unit games to be transferred from the first mode to the second mode is further provided. It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition lottery to the advantageous state for the player is performed, the transition lottery is triggered by the predetermined winning combination being determined as the internal winning combination. And, if the transition lottery occurs, the advantageous state lottery state is ended. Here, in a gaming machine that performs transition lottery to an advantageous state based on an internal winning combination, some players may not receive any transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state, but the gaming machine according to the present invention Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the transition lottery becomes higher and it becomes easier to win the transition lottery. In such a gaming machine, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state, and the game in the advantageous state lottery state is conventionally performed. It can be made less playable and can improve the interest during the advantageous state lottery state.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games to shift the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. This makes it possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state lottery state, since the timing when the winning mode changes to the advantageous mode for the player is different for each advantageous state lottery state, and the advantageous state lottery state is being performed. It can improve the interest.

[Supplementary Note 8]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints, and, for example, in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), identification such as watermelon and cherry as internal winning combination A game machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game characteristic tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for the continuation of AT and ART is It concentrated on only one game and was unable to sustain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuation of an advantageous state (such as AT or ART) over a plurality of games. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that fluctuates and the predetermined operation among the plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines the internal winning combination by probability and stop operation detection means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel Stopping rotation of the reel based on (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by the symbol display, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won. A first advantageous state (e.g., an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a second advantageous state) performed subsequently to the first advantageous state (for example, the main control circuit 91). Advantage state start means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the above-mentioned advantageous state including battle ART), and first advantage state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state And second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, the first advantageous state control means being in the first advantageous state A first effect information registration unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead; Second advantageous state start means for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which any one of several types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered (For example, the sub control circuit 101), the second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead (for example, Second numerical value information (for example, in a game) in which second effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering effect balls) and second effect information (for example, enemy balls) are registered as the effect information. A first numerical value corresponding to the type of the first effect information (for example, the attack power of the enemy character) registered at the end of the first advantageous state is subtracted from the HP of the ally character, and as the effect information Third production Type (for example, enemy) of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, the enemy character's HP) in the game in which the If the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold as a result of subtraction by a numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for subtracting a second numerical value according to the defense power of the character) and the numerical subtraction means And an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, a sub control circuit 101) which newly starts the first advantageous state when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value, and is continued when the second numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value. Here, since subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, whether or not the advantageous state continues is a plurality of times of games Depending on the outcome of the game will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of previous games. From the player's point of view, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of previous games, and to be interested in the subsequent game as well as the current game. , Can improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is made to differ according to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the outcome of the game in the first advantageous state affects the presence or absence of the continuation of the advantageous state, so the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state is increased several times. It can be sustained throughout the game. In addition, by separately determining the subtraction amount of the first numerical information (first numerical value) and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value (second numerical value), for example, the subtraction amounts of the first numerical information and the second numerical information may be both The amount of subtraction of the first numerical information may be large / small, and the amount of subtraction of the second numerical information may be small / large, making the game in the second advantageous state diverse. Can be As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

[Supplementary Note 9]
Pachi-slot 1 of Supplementary Note 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints, and, for example, in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), identification such as watermelon and cherry as internal winning combination A game machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game characteristic tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for the continuation of AT and ART is It concentrated on only one game and was unable to sustain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuation of an advantageous state (such as AT or ART) over a plurality of games. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that fluctuates and the predetermined operation among the plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines the internal winning combination by probability and stop operation detection means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel Stopping rotation of the reel based on (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by the symbol display, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won. A first advantageous state (e.g., an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a second advantageous state) performed subsequently to the first advantageous state (for example, the main control circuit 91). Advantage state start means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the above-mentioned advantageous state including battle ART), and first advantage state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state And second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, the first advantageous state control means being in the first advantageous state A first effect information registration unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead; (1) Numerical addition means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to first numerical information (for example, HP of ally characters) in a game in which the one or more effect information (for example, alley balls) is registered; And second advantageous state start means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for terminating the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which second effect information (for example, boss ball) is registered as , And the second advantageous state control means registers, during the second advantageous state, effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead, during the second advantageous state. In a game in which information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) and third effect information (for example, enemy ball) are registered as the effect information, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, Said Numerical subtraction means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from second numerical information (for example, enemy character's HP) in a game in which fourth effect information (for example, alley ball) is registered as exit information. And when the first numerical information falls below the threshold as a result of subtraction by the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is ended, and the second advantageous state is newly started when the second numerical information falls below the threshold. And an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the sub control circuit 101).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value, and is continued when the second numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value. Here, since subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, whether or not the advantageous state continues is a plurality of times of games Depending on the outcome of the game will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of previous games. From the player's point of view, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of previous games, and to be interested in the subsequent game as well as the current game. , Can improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical information as an opportunity to end the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered in the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical value information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the first numerical information to less than the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantage state but also the outcome of the game in the first advantage state will affect the continuation of the advantage state, so the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantage state to the plurality of games It can be sustained.

[Supplementary Note 10]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints, and, for example, in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), identification such as watermelon and cherry as internal winning combination A game machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game characteristic tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for the continuation of AT and ART is It concentrated on only one game and was unable to sustain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuation of an advantageous state (such as AT or ART) over a plurality of games. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART gaming state) which is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state. A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels The reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the window 4), the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the start operation detection means. A plurality of symbols based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means and the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) which changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among the above, and is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, and detects the stop operation for stopping each reel Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation and the fluctuation of the symbol are stopped by the reel stop control means The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol displaying means. Winning state determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not there is an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which starts the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition; Prior to the start, the determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for determining the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the teammate character) and the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) And effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead, and the first effect information (the effect information) For example, in a game in which an enemy ball is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and a second effect information (for example, an alligator ball) is registered as the effect information. In the technique, when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold as a result of subtraction by the numerical updating means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical information, and the numerical updating means And the advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which newly starts the advantageous state when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value, and the effect information registration means performs the plurality of times When the first effect information is registered as a specific number of times (for example, four times) continuously as effect information in the game of a second, the second effect information as effect information following the first effect information that continues a specific number of times It is characterized by registering.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value, and is continued when the second numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold value. Here, since subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state continues depends on the game results of the plurality of games. It will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of previous games. From the player's point of view, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of previous games, and to be interested in the subsequent game as well as the current game. , Can improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first effect information that is an opportunity to end the advantageous state is registered a specific number of times consecutively, the second effect that is an opportunity to continue the advantageous state as subsequent effect information. Register information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation which is disadvantageous for the player from being sustained for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game in an advantageous state at ease.

[Supplementary Note 11]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  In such gaming machines, gaming machines are known that report information advantageous to the player so as not to lose the role determined as the internal winning combination. For example, when the bonus combination carried over as an internal winning combination is carried over until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-077538), the power supply after the power is turned off. A gaming machine has been disclosed that notifies that a bonus combination has been carried over at the time of restart by reinjection.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the bonus is immediately started when the power is turned on, there is a problem that the fairness among the players is impaired. Also, in the gaming machine, it is common practice to clear the information about the game once at the time of setting change, so for example, the game is ended with the bonus combination carried over on the previous day, and the notification is given the next day By checking whether or not to be detected, the player can grasp whether the setting value has changed from the previous day or has not changed. In this way, being able to grasp the presence or absence of the change in the setting value not only impairs the fairness among the players, but also can impair the interest of the player if it is determined by the player that the setting is low. There is sex.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness among players.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels) , The display window 4), start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which causes the pattern to vary and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91), stop operation detection means (for example, provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (example For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stopping operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. The reel display control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means when the change of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in And effect information climbing for registering effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and determined balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead When a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the effective line in the game in which the effect information is registered in the means (for example, the sub control circuit 101), based on the effect information registered for the game A privilege giving means for giving a privilege (for example, the sub control circuit 101), a power on detection means for detecting the power on (for example, the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101, the power board 44b), and the power on detection Acquisition means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101, and the power supply board 44b) for acquiring the date and time when the means detects the power on and the effect information registration means are based on the date and time acquired by the acquisition means And discarding the registered effect information to newly register effect information in a plurality of games.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, registered effect information is rewritten to new effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on. From the date and time when the power is turned on, for example, it is known that it is the time before the business operation in the game arcade, and by comparing with the date and time when the power is turned off, it is before business the next day. Therefore, by rewriting the effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on, the effect information registered at the time of the power-off of the previous day and the effect information registered at the time of the power-on of the next day will necessarily differ The player can not grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players.

  Here, since this effect information is used for the transition lottery to the advantageous state by the transition lottery means, it is possible to secure more fairness among the players. That is, for example, even if presentation information with high (or low) expectation of transition to the advantageous state at the time of power-off on the previous day is registered, it is rewritten to new presentation information at the time of power-on on the next day. Can be prevented from becoming unfairly treated between the player who knows the player and the player who does not.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to control rewriting of the effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on, the power may be temporarily turned off during business, etc. The status of the gaming machine can be maintained. From the player's point of view, dissatisfaction is made because, even if the power is turned off temporarily when the effect information that is advantageous to the player is registered, the advantageous effect information is maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play the game without feeling it.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a power cut-off detection unit (for example, the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101, and the power supply board 44b) for detecting the power cut-off. The time when the means detects the power off is acquired, and from the date when the power is detected off and the date when the power is detected, the time from the power off to the power on is acquired, The effect information registration means maintains the registered effect information when the time acquired by the acquisition means is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), and the time acquired by the acquisition means is a predetermined time or more In this case, the registered effect information is discarded, and effect information in a plurality of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the registered effect information is rewritten to new effect information when the time from the power-off to the power-on again is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. As a result, the player who plays the game the next day can not grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the registered effect information is maintained without being rewritten if the time from the power-off to the power-on again is less than a predetermined time. As a result, even if the power is turned off temporarily when the effect information which is advantageous for the player is registered, the advantageous effect information is maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play the game without feeling dissatisfaction.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect information registration unit discards the registered effect information and newly registers effect information in a plurality of games, the effect information determined by lottery is newly added. It is characterized in that it is registered as special effect information.

  As a method of making it difficult to grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value, a method of setting the effect information to the initial state at the time of power on of the next day may be considered. Because of that, the diversity of the game diminishes. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since new effect information is registered by lottery when the power is turned on the next day, the variety of games can be secured, which is preferable.

[Supplementary Note 12]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, in recent years, there is known a gaming machine which notifies a player of information for establishing an internal winning combination and the like so as not to lose a role determined as an internal winning combination. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also generally performed to realize an advantageous playing state (ART) for the player by performing in.

  Here, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of gaming states, a gaming machine is widely known in which combinations of symbols displayed in response to a player's stop operation are different, and a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the second symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is performed. There are also known gaming machines that do not.

  In a gaming machine that controls a gaming state according to a combination of symbols displayed in this manner, the player is prevented from knowing that the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed by the secondary control board. There is a known misconduct such as a command spill that will earn an unfair advantage. For example, in the case of the above-described gaming machine, when a combination of symbols disadvantageous to the player is displayed, the secondary control board can not obtain a command including information on the displayed combination of symbols. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state, and as a result, the player gets an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, there is a gaming machine that reports that an error has occurred when a player's cheating is executed during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board. It is already known (see, for example, patent documents (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-059616)). In such a game machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decoration lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and to make it aware that a clerk at a game arcade is cheating. Can be terminated, whereby a fraudulent action that causes a sequence error can be executed, and the player can be prevented from gaining the profit of the game illegally.

  In game machines such as pachislot machines, since the game is performed by performing the stop operation three times following the operation of the start lever, the order of commands to be transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. By checking the order of the commands acquired by the sub control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine as described above, even when the notification of the sequence error is executed by the sound and the decoration lamp when the liquid crystal display device is not installed, the effects of other gaming machines in the game arcade are disturbed. As a result, the effect of notifying the store clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted, and there is a problem that the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game due to the wrongdoing.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems as described above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing illegal gain of a game by fraudulent acts.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels The start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated on condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means Based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for varying the symbol by causing the pattern to be detected, and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, a predetermined probability is selected from among a plurality of combinations. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the internal winning combination and stop operation detection means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (for example For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stopping operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. The reel display control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means when the change of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in A lottery state start means for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) which performs transition lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition as a prize determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) (For example, the sub control circuit 101) and an advantageous state lottery in which a transition lottery is performed to determine transition to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability when a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) elapse in the advantageous state lottery state Means (eg, sub control circuit 101) and lottery state end means (eg, sub control) for terminating the advantageous state lottery state when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the effective line in the advantageous state lottery state A game state control means (for example, a sub control circuit) for shifting the game state to the advantageous state based on the circuit 101) and the result of the transitional lottery of the advantageous state lottery means 101) and game order determination means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for determining the progress order of one game, the lottery state end means, the game order determination means proceeds the game in a predetermined order It is characterized in that the above-mentioned advantageous state lottery state is ended when it is determined that it is not (for example, when a sequence error occurs).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) starting with a predetermined condition, the predetermined number of unit games for which the advantageous state lottery state ends is performed. (2) In order to carry out the granting lottery, it is possible to realize a so-called complete running type chance zone in which the lottery to the advantageous state is made at the completion of the run. Since this advantageous state lottery state ends when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the player performs a stop operation hoping that the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in order to avoid termination.

  In addition, although the advantageous state lottery state is ended when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed during the advantageous state lottery state, the symbol combination displayed due to an illegal act or the like is nullified (can not be grasped), The advantageous state lottery state is temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progression of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and ending the advantageous state lottery state when not progressing in the predetermined order Even if the game progress result (for example, the symbol combination displayed) is nullified, the advantageous state lottery state will not be maintained unfairly, and the player will receive an unfair advantage by fraud. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the internal winning combination determining means as an internal winning combination, the advantageous state lottery means determines to shift to the advantageous state. It is characterized by further performing transition lottery determined with a specific probability.

  In the game in which the combination capable of displaying a predetermined symbol combination is determined as an internal winning combination, although the advantageous condition lottery state may be ended by the predetermined symbol combination being displayed, the transition to an advantageous condition is made. You can receive more lottery. Since this transition lottery is performed when the combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the transition to the advantageous state lottery state will be performed more frequently. Therefore, if it is impossible to grasp the progress of the game and can not grasp the displayed symbol combination, it is possible to receive an excessively large number of transition lottery to an advantageous state triggered by the combination. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, since the advantageous state lottery state is ended regardless of the symbol combination, it is possible for the player to obtain an unfair advantage by fraud. It can be prevented.

[Supplementary Note 13]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been devised from various viewpoints, and, for example, in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), AT according to internal winning combinations including bonus. A gaming machine has been proposed which determines the period of ART or the number of assist games.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may become monotonous and the player may get bored. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method which has not been developed in the prior art as to how to determine the AT period or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like in a manner rich in gaming characteristics.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The internal winning combination is made with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detection means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel 91) the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed, and the fluctuation provided to the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Prize determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) performed subsequently to the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantaged state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and (2) Second advantageous state control means (for example, secondary control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in two advantageous states, and the first advantageous state control means is advantageous with the first effect information (for example, an alligator ball) A predetermined number (for example, six) of a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including a plurality of types of second effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) having different continuation expectation degrees of the state Determine presentation information, perform Identification information (for example, the sub control circuit 101) stored in the output information storage means (for example, the sub RAM 103), and a specific number smaller than the predetermined number of the predetermined number of effect information stored in the effect information storage means Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying number (for example, 5) pieces of effect information as effect information in a specific number of games including the current game, and first effect information as effect information in the current game Numerical addition means (for example, sub control circuit 101) that adds a first predetermined value to first numerical value information (for example, HP of allied characters) in the displayed game, and the internal winning combination determination means is a specific combination (for example, , And the combination of the second effect information stored in the effect information storage means to the first effect information (for example A second advantageous state in which the first advantageous state is ended and the second advantageous state is started in a game in which one of a plurality of types of second effect information is registered as the circuit 101) and the effect information in the current game A second start state control means (for example, a sub control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means is registered from the first numerical information at the end of the first advantageous state according to a first condition; The second effect registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) is subtracted from the first specific value corresponding to the type of the effect information, and according to the second condition. When the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold as a result of subtraction by a numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for subtracting a second specific value according to the type of information, the advantageous state is ended. , Said second numerical information Continuation control means for continuing a beneficial state goes below serial threshold (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold first in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is the first threshold. As the value of the first numerical value information is larger, the advantageous state is more likely to be continued, and the period of the advantageous state is extended. The value of the first numerical value information is added in the game in which the first effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the second effect information is displayed in the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is performed is ended, and the second advantageous information in which the first numerical information is subtracted is performed. It will shift to the state. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game, instead of simply controlling the period of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination. The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed effect information, and the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second effect information that will end the first advantageous state is rewritten to the first effect information, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state. By replacing the second effect information with the first effect information, it is possible for the player to have an expectation for the addition of the first numerical information, and therefore the player is not limited to the effect information being displayed. I will pay attention to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, control of the period of the advantageous state can be made richer in game playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination rewriting means is a second specific one of the effect information in the specified number of games displayed on the display means, wherein the expectation for continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined The rendering information is characterized by being maintained without being rewritten to the first rendering information.

  As described above, the larger the first numerical value information, the easier it is to continue the advantageous state, while the plurality of types of second effect information have different expectations for continuation of the advantageous state. 2. If an advantageous state starts, then you can have an expectation that the advantageous state will continue. If the second effect information in which such an advantageous state is easy to continue has been rewritten to the first effect information, there is also a possibility that the advantageous state may become difficult to continue. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific second effect information in which the continuation expectation of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined level is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information. This makes it possible to make the determination of the period of the advantageous state more rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination reversing means is not displayed on the display means, and the first effect information is stored for the specific second effect information stored in the effect information storage means. It is characterized by rewriting to.

  In such a gaming machine, the specific second effect information to be maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information is limited to the one being displayed on the display means, and the second effect information is merely stored without being displayed. Rewrite to 1 production information. Since the player can not comprehend the non-displayed effect information, by rewriting such effect information into the first effect information, the player can gain the benefits without giving a dissatisfaction to the player. Balance can be achieved.

[Supplementary Note 14]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been devised from various viewpoints, and, for example, in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), AT according to internal winning combinations including bonus. A gaming machine has been proposed which determines the period of ART or the number of assist games.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may become monotonous and the player may get bored. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method which has not been developed in the prior art as to how to determine the AT period or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like in a manner rich in gaming characteristics.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The internal winning combination is made with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detection means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel 91) the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed, and the fluctuation provided to the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Prize determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) performed subsequently to the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantaged state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and The second advantageous state control means (for example, secondary control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, and the first advantageous state control means has a plurality of types of effects having different continuation expectations of the advantageous state From the information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8), a predetermined number (for example, six pieces) of effect information (for example, effect balls) is determined, and effect information stored in the effect information storage means (for example, sub RAM 103) Climb In the present game, a specific number (for example, five pieces) of effect information smaller than the predetermined number among the predetermined number of effect information stored in the recording means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the effect information storage means If the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) to be displayed as effect information in the specified number of games including, and the internal winning combination determining means determine the specific combination (for example, the combination pertaining to BB) as the internal winning combination, A game in which one or more pieces of effect information stored in the storage means are rewritten with new effect information, and profit state rewriting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and predetermined effect information being displayed as effect information in the current game A second advantageous state initiating means which ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state (for example, when a push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination) when a specific condition is satisfied in (For example, the sub control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means determines the first numerical information from the first numerical information according to the first condition (for example, at the pushing order bell at the time of setting the enemy ball). The first specific value corresponding to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the advantageous state is subtracted, and according to the second condition (for example, at the time of the push order bell at the time of the team set) second numerical information A first subtraction unit (eg, the sub control circuit 101) for subtracting a second specific value corresponding to the type of effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the first subtraction result of the first subtraction unit; Continuation control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) which ends an advantageous state when numerical information falls below a threshold, and continues an advantageous state when the second numerical information falls below the threshold.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold first in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is the first threshold. Continue if less than. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed according to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, the effect information displayed during the first advantageous state is It will affect the duration of the advantageous state. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game, instead of simply controlling the period of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination. The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed effect information, so that the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first advantageous state, one or more pieces of effect information stored in the effect information storage means are rewritten to new effect information. . As a result, when the effect information for the continuation of the advantageous state is replaced with the effect information having a high expectation, the player is in an advantageous situation, and conversely, when the effect for the continuation of the advantage state is rewritten to the effect information. Since the player is in a situation disadvantageous to the player, the player pays attention not only to the displayed effect information but also to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, control of the period of the advantageous state can be made richer in game playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means is specific effect information having a predetermined degree or more of expectation for continuation of an advantageous state among effect information in a specified number of games displayed on the display means. Is maintained without being rewritten to new presentation information.

  According to such a gaming machine, even when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific effect information having the continuation expectation degree equal to or higher than the predetermined one is maintained without being rewritten to another effect information. As a result, when there is specific effect information among the specified number of effect information being displayed, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a profit by the specific effect information, so the player has an expectation. The game can be held and played later, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means rewrites the specific effect information stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means, to new effect information. It is characterized by

  In such a gaming machine, the specific effect information to be maintained without being rewritten into another effect information is limited to the one being displayed on the display means, and the other effect is displayed for the one that is merely stored without being displayed. Rewrite information. Since the player can not grasp the non-displayed effect information, by rewriting such effect information to another effect information, the player can gain the benefit without giving a dissatisfaction to the player. Balance can be achieved.

[Supplementary Note 15]
Pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been devised from various viewpoints, and, for example, in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), AT according to internal winning combinations including bonus. A gaming machine has been proposed which determines the period of ART or the number of assist games.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may become monotonous and the player may get bored. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method which has not been developed in the prior art as to how to determine the AT period or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like in a manner rich in gaming characteristics.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The internal winning combination is made with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detection means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel 91) the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed, and the fluctuation provided to the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Prize determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) performed subsequently to the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantaged state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and The second advantageous state control means (for example, the secondary control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, and the first advantageous state control means includes a plurality of types of the plurality of types having different continuation expectations of the advantageous state A lottery that defines information (for example, boss MAP data) of a lottery value for determining presentation information from a plurality of types of presentation information (for example, presentation balls) including one presentation information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) Love Information (eg, boss MAP), lottery information storage means (eg, ROM cartridge substrate 76) for storing a plurality of information, and one lottery information of the plurality of lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means When the effect information is determined based on the one lottery information, the lottery information for determining the presentation information is updated from the one lottery information to the other lottery information. Based on lottery information determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101, boss MAP lottery table) and lottery information determined by the lottery information determination means, effects in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead The effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) which determines information and any one of a plurality of types of first effect information are registered as the effect information in the current game When a specific condition is satisfied in the game being played (for example, when a push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state is ended and the second advantageous state is started to start the second advantageous state The means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the second advantageous state control means continue the advantageous state based on the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. A continuation control unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling whether or not the lottery information storage unit is the expectation value of continuation of the advantageous state as the information of the lottery value for determining the first effect information The special lottery information (for example, boss MAP 52) which defines only for the special first effect information (for example, boss balls 7 and 8) of a predetermined number or more is stored, and the lottery information determining means performs lottery for determining the effect information. As information When determining the special lottery information, without updating from the special lottery information to other lottery information, and maintains a special lottery information.

  Such a gaming machine has a plurality of types of first effect information having different continuation expectations of the advantageous state, and the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. Control the continuation of the advantageous state based on that. From the player's point of view, they will have a strong interest in the type of presentation information currently displayed, as compared to gaming machines that control the period of advantageous state simply based on the internal winning combination as before. Control of the period of advantage can be made playful.

  Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect information to be registered for a predetermined game among a plurality of types of effect information is determined based on the lottery information, and the lottery information is updated every time the effect information is determined. Update to random lottery information. Among the lottery information, the first effect information serving as a trigger for ending the first advantageous state includes special lottery information in which only the special first effect information for which the continuation expectation degree of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined value is determined. Once the lottery information is updated to the special lottery information, the special lottery information is maintained without being updated from the special lottery information to other lottery information. As a result, once the special lottery information is updated, only the special first effect information having a high degree of continuation expectation of the advantageous state is determined as the first effect information. Also, it is possible to make the control of the period of the advantageous state more rich in game play, by focusing on the lottery information for determining the.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation control means of the second advantageous state control means is adapted to execute first numerical information (e.g., at the time of pushing order bell at the time of setting an enemy ball). The first specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state is subtracted from the HP of the ally character, and a second condition (for example, pressing order at the time of ally ball set) A numerical subtraction means (subtracting a second specific value corresponding to the type of first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state) from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) according to the bell winning time For example, when the first numerical information falls below the threshold as a result of subtraction by the sub control circuit 101) and the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical information falls below the threshold, and the advantageous state is continued when the second numerical information falls below the threshold. Continuation control means (eg, Control circuit 101), and the special lottery information (for example, bosses MAP 52, 53) includes the special first effect information and the second effect information (for example, allies ball) from among a plurality of types of effect information Information of the lottery value is defined so that it can be determined, and the first advantageous state control means adds the first predetermined value to the first numerical value information in the game in which the second effect information is determined as the effect information in the current game It is characterized by further comprising numerical addition means (for example, sub control circuit 101).

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold first in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is the first threshold. Continue if less than. In this case, by defining information of the lottery value for the second effect information to be added with the first numerical value information to the above-mentioned special lottery information, it is advantageous after the special lottery information is once updated, Only the special first effect information having a high degree of continuation expectation of the state or the second effect information to which the first numerical value information is added will be determined. As a result, when the special first effect information is determined, as described above, the expectation for continuation of the advantageous state increases, and when the second effect information is determined, the first numerical information increases. Since it becomes difficult for 1 numerical information to be reduced below the threshold value, the expectation for continuation of the advantageous state is similarly increased. Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, once the special lottery information is updated, the player can have an expectation that the advantageous state will continue, so the player determines the presentation information. It is possible to make the control of the period of the advantageous state rich in playability as well as the lottery information for making the game.

[Supplementary Note 16]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that the period of being Therefore, in recent years, various devices have been made to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the continuation of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-045992), AT and ART continue. There has been proposed a gaming machine which maintains a sense of expectation over a plurality of games by informing whether or not to use the result of the battle effect.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the battle outcome in the conventional gaming machine such as the patent document is determined in advance by the continuous lottery performed at the start of the battle presentation etc., the player is interested in the contents of the battle presentation. It will focus only on the outcome of the game without going ahead, and there is a risk that the battle production itself will be unattractive.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of AT or the like in a manner rich in gaming characteristics.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The internal winning combination is made with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detection means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel 91) the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed, and the fluctuation provided to the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Prize determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line ( For example, the main control circuit 91), an advantageous state start unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which starts the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition, the first effect information (for example, the enemy ball), and the second effect Out of a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including information (for example, ally balls), effect information to be registered for a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead is selected with a predetermined probability A first predetermined value is subtracted from first numerical information (for example, HP of allied characters) in a game in which effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) to be determined and first effect information is registered as the effect information. In addition, in the game in which the second effect information is registered as the effect information, numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub control circuit 10) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) 1) When the first numerical information falls below the threshold as a result of subtraction by the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is ended, and when the second numerical information falls below the threshold, the advantageous state is started anew. The effect information registration means registers the first effect information when the first numerical information becomes less than the change threshold as a result of subtraction by the state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the numerical subtraction means. And probability changing means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for changing the probability to be determined.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information falls below the threshold first, and continues when the second numerical information falls below the threshold first. . Here, subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the type of effect information registered, and in the game in which the first effect information is registered, the first numerical information is subtracted, and 2) In the game in which the effect information is registered, the second numerical information is subtracted. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, continuation of the advantageous state is controlled based on the type of effect information to be registered. Thus, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which the presence or absence of the continuation is determined in advance, the gaming machine according to the present invention is different in the presence or absence of the continuation depending on the flow of the game in the advantageous state. Control of the period of the game can be made fun.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first numerical value information becomes less than the change threshold value, the probability of determining the first effect information as effect information to be registered is changed. As a result, for example, the first effect information becomes difficult to determine, and thereafter, the first numerical information becomes difficult to be subtracted, and the advantageous state becomes easy to continue. On the contrary, for example, when the first effect information is easily determined, the first numerical value information is easily subtracted thereafter, and the advantageous state becomes difficult to continue. As described above, by changing the probability of determining the effect information based on the value of the first numerical value information, it is possible to make the control of the period of the advantageous state more rich in game characteristics.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an opponent determining means (for example, a sub-player determining means for determining one attribute information out of a plurality of types of attribute information (for example, types of enemy characters) associated with the second numerical information. The control circuit 101) is further provided, and the probability changing means changes the probability to the first probability when the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means is the first attribute information, and the opponent determining means When the determined attribute information is second attribute information, the probability is changed to a second probability different from the first probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability after change to determine the effect information is different depending on the type of the attribute information associated with the second numerical information, so for example, according to the opponent in the battle effect The probability after change can be made different. As a result, even if the first numerical information decreases to the change threshold value and the advantageous state is close to the end, it is possible to produce an effect such that some opponents in the battle production may easily reverse, so control of the period of the advantageous state Can be made more game-friendly.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the change threshold which triggers the probability changing means to change the probability is different depending on the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the change threshold value differs depending on the type of the attribute information associated with the second numerical information, so that, for example, the probability of determining the rendering information according to the opponent in the battle rendering The timing of making the change can be different. As a result, for example, since it is possible to set various timings at which the reversal is likely to occur in the battle rendition, control of the period of the advantageous state can be made richer in the game characteristic.

[Supplementary Note 17]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, there are also known gaming machines which are provided with various decorative members (for example, movable characters) in the gaming machine and move the decorative members in accordance with the progress of the game to enhance the game characteristics. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-237715), a gaming machine is disclosed that notifies the player of an internal winning combination by operating a movable role based on the result of the internal lottery. There is.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, only the movable role is operated to notify the result of the internal lottery, and the content of the notification is too easy to understand for the player, and it gradually becomes tired. There was a risk that interest in features would diminish. If the player's interest is diminished, the operating rate of the gaming machine will also decrease, and therefore, in the gaming machine equipped with the movable feature, a device that does not lose interest in the movable feature is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing a game without making a player bored.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming state having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a CZ or ART gaming state) advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state. An effect for registering effect information to be used in a predetermined game among a plurality of effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and a decision ball) having different degrees of expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state. Information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101), and display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying the registered effect information when a predetermined condition (for example, operation of apocalypse) is satisfied in the normal state And, in the game in which the display means is displaying the effect information, a transition lottery means (for example, a sub device for performing transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the effect information being displayed) Control circuit 101), and game state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for shifting the game state to the advantageous state based on the result of the transition lottery of the transition lottery means, and a movable type capable of performing a predetermined operation A character (for example, the rotary character 200), character control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101, the rotary character control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable character, and the light for the movable character Light emitting control device (for example, an LED provided at the back of the eyeball main body 203) and light emission control means (for example, sub control circuit 101, LED provided at the back of the eyeball main body 203) A substrate), an article movable lottery means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for determining whether or not to operate the movable prize in a game in which the display means does not display the effect information; Object movement A promotion lottery means for performing promotion lottery of whether or not the registered presentation information is rewritten to presentation information having a higher expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state, when it is determined that the whistle means operates the movable role (For example, the sub control circuit 101), the effect information registration unit rewrites the registered effect information based on the result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery unit, and the role control unit When it is determined that the movable item is movable, the movable item is operated, and the light emission control unit is based on the result of the judgment of the movable item. The light emission of the light emitting device is controlled based on the result of the promoted lottery of the promoted lottery means when the movable part is operated.

  In such a gaming machine, when the movable type goods are operated, the promotion lottery of the effect information used for the transition lottery of the advantageous state is performed. Here, in the game in which the display means displays the effect information, since the transition lottery to the advantageous state is performed based on the displayed effect information, the player has a strong interest in the promotion lottery of the effect information. Will have On the other hand, since the movable type product operates based on the determination result of the character movable lottery unit when the display unit does not display the effect information, the promotion lottery is a hidden operation that is not displayed on the display unit. Will be performed on the From the viewpoint of the player, the situation becomes advantageous to itself (the winning lottery is won) by notifying the mobile lottery that the promotion lottery for the information thus hidden is being performed using the movable character. Expectations about what you are will last, and you will continue playing without getting bored. In addition, by controlling the light emission of the light emitting device according to the result of the promotion lottery, it is possible to infer from the light emission (for example, color) of the movable part that the situation is advantageous, The player can continue playing the game without getting bored, since he will have a strong interest in the later game if it can be inferred to be advantageous.

[Supplementary Note 18]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to lose the role determined to the internal winning combination. There is. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine which performs AT in a high probability re-playing state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that a replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination may be called an ART machine or the like.

  A gaming machine equipped with such an AT (ART) function may perform AT lottery whether or not to perform AT during a bonus game, and may notify the result of AT lottery at the end of the bonus game. For example, according to the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-183284), it is assumed that the bonus game may end in the remaining 2 games if the remaining payout number becomes 16 to 30 during the bonus game. There has been proposed a gaming machine which switches the image display to a challenge notification screen for notifying the presence or absence of winning of AT (ART).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, since the number of medals to be awarded during the bonus game varies depending on the internal winning combination, the number of medals to be awarded is the remaining payout depending on the internal winning combination after switching the image display on the challenge notification screen May not reach In such a case, when notifying the presence or absence of winning of AT as in Patent Document 1, processing at the end of the bonus game will be executed even though the bonus game has not ended, It will give a sense of distrust to the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a player of the end time of a state advantageous to the player such as a bonus. Do.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine in which the maximum number of gaming media to be awarded in unit games is a predetermined number, and a plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, etc.) displaying a plurality of symbols. 3R), symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reel, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91) for detecting a start operation by the player , Start switch 64), and symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, and the start operation detection means Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of winning combinations based on the detection of the start operation by Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and stopping by the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation detecting means Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the operation is detected; The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the player has won a prize, and the internal winning combination determining means If it is determined that the internal winning combination has been won, a profit giving means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for giving a number of game media according to the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and a predetermined condition Profit state start means (for example, main control circuit 91) which starts a profit state (for example, bonus state) as a trigger, and counting means (for example, for counting the number of gaming media provided by the profit giving means during the profit state) Main control circuit 91), and profit state end means (for example, main control circuit 91) which ends the profit state when the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold (for example, 59 sheets); And an effect control unit (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for controlling an effect to be executed during the profit state, wherein the effect control unit is based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit. When the number of gaming media being counted by the counting means at the timing of detection exceeds the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold value, a profit state end effect is produced as an effect at the end of the game according to the detected start operation Is registered, and the game medium is provided by the profit giving means in the game according to the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, as a result of which the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold If it is, the registered profit state end effect is executed, and if the number of gaming media counted by the counting means is less than the threshold value, the registered profit state end effect is obtained. It is characterized by changing to continuation presentation and performing the said profit state continuation presentation.

  In such a gaming machine, when there is a possibility that the number of gaming media provided during the profit state may exceed the threshold at the timing when the start operation is detected, the profit state end effect is displayed as the effect at the end of the game. Register. At this time, depending on the number of gaming media actually awarded in the game, the number of gaming media awarded during the profit state may not exceed the threshold, so in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the gaming, Based on the result of the provision of the game medium, the registered profit state end effect is changed to a profit state continued effect. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, although the profit status end effect is registered once at the start of the game where the profit status may end, if the profit status does not end as a result of the game, The profit state continuation effect is executed without executing the profit state end effect. This makes it possible to prevent the effect at the end of the profit state from being executed despite the fact that the profit state is not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the end time of the profit state. .

[Supplementary Note 19]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, there is also widely known a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-223289), there is proposed a gaming machine which operates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time may be called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game with a high probability of replay success until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

  In addition to the replay time, there is also known a gaming machine which reports information advantageous to the player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination to the player. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Also, a gaming machine that performs AT during the replay time may be called an ART machine or the like.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In recent years, gaming machines that perform AT during the flag RT described above are also known. In such a gaming machine, when the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is won, the flag interval RT is ended, so the player performs the game while performing the stop operation so that the bonus is not won. Will do. By the way, since the knowledge about the gaming machine differs depending on the player, in the gaming machine which requests the predetermined stop operation during the flag RT, there is a possibility that the player with little knowledge about the gaming machine may receive a disadvantage. For example, for a player who has knowledge of the gaming machine, although the player can play the game while maintaining the flag RT by performing the stop operation so that the bonus is not won, the player who does not have knowledge of the gaming machine There is a possibility that a bonus will be won without performing this stop operation, and in this case, as a result of the end of the inter-flag RT, the player may be disadvantaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the disadvantage that a player without knowledge of the gaming machine receives.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels) , The display window 4), start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which causes the pattern to vary and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91), stop operation detection means (for example, provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (example For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stopping operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. The reel display control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means when the change of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in If the specific winning combination is determined by the prize determination means, the profit state is started, and if the end condition is satisfied in the profit state, the profit state is ended. Profit control means (for example, the main control circuit 91), a low RT state (for example, RT2) having a low probability that a replay related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination, and the replay is determined as the internal winning combination Control means (e.g., main control circuit 91) for controlling the transition of the gaming state between the high RT state (e.g., RT4) whose probability of being raised is higher than the low RT state, and a predetermined condition (e.g., ART) Triggered by a lottery, the first advantageous state (e.g., hostile ART) and the second advantageous state (e.g., battle ART) performed subsequently to the first advantageous state are advantageous for the provision of gaming media. Advantage state start means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for shifting the effect state relating to the game to an advantage state (for example, ART gaming state) in which information on the stop operation is notified; First advantageous state control means (for example, secondary control circuit 101) for controlling the progression of the game in the state, and second advantageous state control means (for example, secondary control circuit 101) for controlling the progression of the game in the second advantageous state And the RT control means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state when the predetermined combination (for example, the combination related to JACIN) is determined as the internal winning combination during the profit state, and the profit state When a combination of symbols according to the predetermined combination (for example, C_JACIN1 to C_JACIN3) is displayed by the symbol display means, the gaming state is shifted to the low RT state, and the advantageous state start means is the profit state. When the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the first state, the effect state is transferred to the advantageous state after the end of the profit state, and the first advantageous state control means First effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of previous games during the state, and the effect information Numerical addition means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to first numerical information (for example, HP of allied characters) in a game in which first effect information (for example, allied balls) is registered; Second advantageous state start means (for example, sub control) which ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state in a game in which second effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered as information Circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means registers second effect information to register effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead during the second advantageous state. Means (e.g., sub control circuit 101) and a game in which third effect information (e.g., an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and the effect Numerical subtraction means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from second numerical information in a game in which fourth effect information (for example, allies ball) is registered as information, and subtraction by the numerical subtraction means As a result, the continuous control means (for example, the sub control circuit) which terminates the advantageous state when the first numerical value information becomes smaller than a threshold and newly starts the first advantageous state when the second numerical value information becomes smaller than the threshold 101).

  In such a gaming machine, if the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the profit condition, it shifts to the high RT condition, but if a combination of symbols according to the predetermined symbol is displayed, it shifts to the low RT condition It will Therefore, a player who has knowledge of gaming machines can maintain a high RT state by playing a game while avoiding the display of combinations of symbols corresponding to predetermined roles, but has no knowledge of gaming machines. The player may display a combination of symbols according to a predetermined combination, and may fall from the high RT state to the low RT state.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an advantageous state in which information of an advantageous stop operation regarding provision of gaming media is notified. This advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information falls below the threshold first, and continues when the second numerical information falls below the threshold first. Therefore, the value of the first numerical information affects the duration of the advantageous state, and the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is performed extends the duration of the advantageous state. Period of opportunity.

  Here, the advantageous state is executed depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state ((low RT state or high) Regardless of whether it is in the RT state). Therefore, even if a player without knowledge of the gaming machine falls into the low RT state during the profit state, the chance period for extending the duration of the advantageous state after the profit state ends (the first advantageous state Can be performed, and the disadvantage experienced by a player without knowledge of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Supplementary Note 20]
Pachi-slot 1 of Supplementary Note 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there is also known a gaming machine which reports information advantageous to a player to a player so as not to lose the role decided as an internal winning combination. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also generally performed to realize an advantageous playing state (ART) for the player by performing in.

  Here, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of gaming states, a gaming machine is widely known in which combinations of symbols displayed in response to a player's stop operation are different, and a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the second symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is performed. There are also known gaming machines that do not.

  In a gaming machine that controls a gaming state according to a combination of symbols displayed in this manner, the player is prevented from knowing that the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed by the secondary control board. There is a known misconduct such as a command spill that will earn an unfair advantage. For example, in the case of the above-described gaming machine, when a combination of symbols disadvantageous to the player is displayed, the secondary control board can not obtain a command including information on the displayed combination of symbols. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state, and as a result, the player gets an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, there is a gaming machine that reports that an error has occurred when a player's cheating is executed during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board. It is already known (see, for example, patent documents (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-059616)). In such a game machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decoration lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and to make it aware that a clerk at a game arcade is cheating. Can be terminated, whereby a fraudulent action that causes a sequence error can be executed, and the player can be prevented from gaining the profit of the game illegally.

  In game machines such as pachislot machines, since the game is performed by performing the stop operation three times following the operation of the start lever, the order of commands to be transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. By checking the order of the commands acquired by the sub control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine as described above, even when the notification of the sequence error is executed by the sound and the decoration lamp when the liquid crystal display device is not installed, the effects of other gaming machines in the game arcade are disturbed. As a result, the effect of notifying the store clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted, and there is a problem that the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game due to the wrongdoing.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems as described above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing illegal gain of a game by fraudulent acts.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a probability that the probability that the replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) and the replay is determined as an internal winning combination A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of displayed symbols, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by a player; A symbol variation unit (for example, a main control circuit) that varies the symbol by rotating the reel on condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit 1) and internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means; Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stop switch 64) for detecting the stop operation for stopping each of the reels, corresponding to the reels, and the internal determined by the internal winning combination determining means Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means For example, based on the main control circuit 91) and the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol by the reel stop control means, the effective provided in the symbol display means The determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines the combination of the symbols stopped on the in, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the normal state (for example, when the RT4 transition ripple is displayed), the normal state From the high RT state, when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high RT state, and RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for shifting the gaming state to the high RT state from When it is determined that the gaming state is shifted to the normal state and the specific symbol combination is stopped, the RT termination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) maintaining the high RT state, the normal state or the high If you win the first lottery (for example, the transition to ART transition lottery) performed during the RT state, the effect state regarding the game, a specific effect state (for example, ART gaming state) to notify the information of the advantageous stop operation The probability of winning the first lottery if a specific effect state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to be shifted to and the second lottery (for example, avoidance point lottery) performed during the high RT state is won When it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high probability state, and the high probability state transition means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to shift to a high probability state (for example, high probability gaming state) Low probability state transition means (for example, sub control circuit 101) to shift to a low probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is low, and game order determination means (for example, sub control) for determining the progression order of one game A circuit 101), and the low probability state transition means determines that the game order determination means does not advance the game in a predetermined order during the high probability state (for example, a sequence error occurs) In time), and wherein the shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery performed in the normal state or the high RT state is won, the game machine shifts to a specific effect state (so-called ART) in which information of advantageous stop operation is notified. In addition, when the second lottery is won in the high RT state, the high RT state is set as the transition chance segment to the specific effect state (ART) in order to shift to the high probability state having a high probability of winning the first lottery. be able to.

  Here, when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped in the high RT state (= high probability state), although the RT termination unit makes a transition from the high RT state to the normal state, the symbol combination displayed by cheating or the like is zero. If you do (do not understand), the high probability state will be temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progression of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and transitioning to a low probability state when not progressing in a predetermined order Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) has been nullified, the high probability state is not unduly maintained, and the player gets an unfair advantage due to the injustice. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the low probability state, the first lottery is performed on condition that a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination or more) is determined as the internal combination by the internal combination determination means. In the high probability state, the first lottery is performed on the condition that any one of a plurality of roles (for example, all roles) including the predetermined role is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. It is characterized by

  According to such a gaming machine, in the high probability state, the first lottery is performed based on more kinds of roles than the low probability state, so the high probability state is maintained unreasonably. And the player gets an unfair profit. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the high probability state is unreasonably maintained since the high probability state is shifted to the low probability state regardless of the symbol combination. It is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unfair advantage by cheating.

[Supplementary Note 21]
Pachislot 1 in Appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  In such gaming machines, it is common practice to perform various effects according to the progress of the game, and for example, effects (vibrations) that shake in patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-144940) There is disclosed a gaming machine capable of swinging a screen display appropriately while preventing an increase in data capacity by arranging and overlapping different image data in a plurality of layers when performing display). .

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, it is required to switch the effects according to the progress of the game such as when the reel starts rotating or when the reels stop, etc. In the patent document 1, the effects are switched according to the progress of the game. Is not disclosed at all, and further improvements are required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately switching effects in accordance with the progress of a game.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an effect, and a first effect and a second effect which can be switched from the effect before switching to the effect after switching according to the progress of the game. Display control means for controlling the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selection means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and selecting the effect to be displayed in a predetermined game from among a plurality of effects For example, the sub control circuit 101), and detection means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for detecting a switching request (for example, start command, reel stop command) of effects being displayed on the display means according to the progress of the game When the display control means detects the switching request, the display control means performs the switching presentation when the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means. Switching the effect to be displayed on the display means by switching from one layer for executing to another layer for executing the effect after switching, and the same effect is selected when the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means The effect to be displayed in the layer is switched from the effect before switching to the effect after switching, thereby switching the effect to be displayed on the display means.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention changes the layer in which the effect is being executed, thereby switching the effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and the second effect in which the effect is switched in accordance with the progress of the game in the same layer , And select one of the plurality of effects including the first effect and the second effect to be displayed. Here, when switching effects by switching layers as in the first effect, although it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flickering of the image before and after switching of effects, since effects have to be performed in each layer, Processing load will increase. On the other hand, when switching the effects to be performed in the same layer as in the second effect, the processing load may be suppressed, but flickering of the image may occur before and after the switching of the effects.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a preferable switching method is set in advance for each effect according to the connection of effects before and after switching, the processing load of each effect, and the like. As a result, for example, for effects (first effects) that may cause flicker to easily occur before and after switching, it is possible to set a method of switching layers, and flicker may be generated. For effects that do not bother (second effect), it is possible to set a method of switching effects in the same layer. As a result, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to flicker at the time of switching of the effect, and also suppress the processing load, and the process may be dropped in response to the switching of the effect. As a result, it is possible to appropriately switch the effects according to the progress of the game.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the detection means responds to the operation prompted by the informing means. [1] While detecting the switching request, the second switching request is detected according to the progress of the game without the operation performed by the notification unit being performed, and the display control unit causes the detection unit to perform the first switching When the request is detected, the effect to be displayed on the display means is switched from the effect before switching to the effect after the first switching according to the first switching request, and the detecting means detects the second switching request. Is characterized in that the effect to be displayed on the display means is switched from the effect before switching to the effect after the second switching according to the second switching request.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine, the player may be prompted to operate a button such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the button operation is performed. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the effects to be switched can be made different depending on when the button operation is performed and when it is not performed, the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Also in this case, since a preferable switching method is set for each effect, the effects can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

[Supplementary Note 22]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random number values are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed to plural reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  In such gaming machines, it is common practice to perform various effects according to the progress of the game, and in particular, in recent years, not only display devices but also other devices (for example, There is also known a gaming machine that uses a character to produce effects. For example, the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200614) discloses a gaming machine that performs effects and displays in conjunction with a display device and a movable body that can move to a position partially overlapping the display device. There is.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a game machine, while the effect is being performed, cooperation between the display device and other devices is achieved and no inconvenience occurs, but in the non-effect state such as when various errors occur or when the menu screen is activated. The presence of another device may make it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the display device (for example, notification of an error, display of a menu screen, etc.), and the presence of the other device may be in the way.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which does not disturb display on a display device.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an image, and a recess provided on the front of the display device and having a reflection surface for reflecting light along the plate surface to the player A transmissive panel (for example, light guide plate 401) on which a latent image (for example, latent image 402) is formed by (for example, reflective recess 402a), and a light emitting device (for example, LED 403) that emits light along the plate surface of the transmissive panel A display control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the display of the display device; a light emission control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101; panel control board 79) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting device; A detection unit (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for detecting a call request for an effect image (for example, a screen for notifying an error, a menu screen); and the light emission control unit is based on effect data A light emission output control unit (for example, a panel control board 79) that causes the light emitting device to emit light according to the output request of the effect execution unit; And the light emission output control means turns off the light emitting device by giving priority to the call request over the output request when the detection means detects the call request when the output request is received from the effect execution means. The effect execution means makes an output request for light emission based on effect data regardless of whether the detection means detects a call request for a non-effect image, and the display control means makes the detection means non-effect When a call request for an image is detected, a non-effect image is displayed on the display device.

  According to such a game machine, the light emitting device emits a light beam to the transmission panel provided on the front surface of the display device, whereby an image according to the latent image formed on the transmission panel on the front surface of the display device Is displayed, it is possible to perform effects in cooperation with the display device and the transmissive panel, and it is possible to perform effective effects as compared with the case where effects are simply performed in the display device. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, when there is a request for calling a non-effect image such as a screen for error notification or a menu screen, the non-effect image is displayed on the display device and the light emitting device is turned off. Thus, when the non-effect image is displayed on the display device, the display of the display device is not disturbed, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transmission request for the non-effect image is prioritized over the light emission output request, so even if the call request is made during the execution of the effect using the transmission panel, the transmission panel is The presentation using is interrupted, and the visibility of the non-presentation image is not impaired. Further, since the light emission output request from the effect execution means to the light emission output control means is made regardless of the call request for the non-effect image, the call request is made during the execution of the effect using the transmissive panel, Also, it is not necessary to add processing such as error processing to the rendering processing itself, and the processing can be simplified and the occurrence of a bug can be suppressed. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a call request is made during the execution of the effect using the transmissive panel, the output of the light emission is suppressed while continuing the animation of the light emission based on the effect data internally. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display of the non-effect image from being disturbed, and at the end of the display of the non-effect image, restart the effect using the transmissive panel from the continuation of the processing which has been continued internally. It is possible to perform an effective rendering using the display device and the transmissive panel.

[Supplementary Note 23]
Pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine provided with a decorative portion corresponding to the type of gaming machine to improve the gameplay is also known. As a decoration part, there exist some which perform mechanical operation | movement, light emission, or both, for example, and such a decoration part is generally called "a character (movable property)." As a gaming machine using prizes, for example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-042691) discloses a gaming machine in which a movable prize that rotates is installed above the front door.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the movable type, the motor and the gear mechanism are consumed by the load accompanying the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, the occurrence of the failure makes it impossible to execute the presentation specific to the movable type, It will cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can reduce the wear of movable movable objects.

  The present invention is made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the consumption of a movable type property.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of movable parts (for example, the cover member 198) including an initial position (for example, a position where the eyeball main body 203 becomes invisible to the player) and a predetermined position (for example, a position where the eyeball main body 203 is exposed) A movable part (for example, a rotary part 200) movable to the position of b), and a part control means (for example, a sub control circuit 101, a rotary part control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable part And a clock means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for clocking a non-operation time indicating a period in which the player's operation is not received, and the bonus control means is configured to move the movable based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Of the feature The moving unit is moved from the initial position to a predetermined position (for example, a position at which the cover member 198 is in a half open state), and the clocking unit operates the non-operation time when the movable portion of the movable part moves to a predetermined position Timing control is started, and the accessory control means returns the movable part of the movable accessory to the initial position when the non-operation time counted by the timing means reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes). A game machine that features it.

  When the non-operation time reaches the predetermined time, there is a high possibility that the player has not performed any operation and is not playing. As described above, if the unique effect by the movable combination is continued until the game is not in progress, the movable combination is exhausted. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the non-operation time is predetermined. When the time is reached, the movable part of the movable part is returned to the initial position to reduce the wear of the movable part. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of the movable property while improving the interest of the game by the specific effect using the movable property.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition is that a state of playing a game is the advantageous state, and a game start operation is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is performed in the advantageous state, the movable part of the movable part is positioned at a predetermined position, and a unique effect using the movable part is obtained in the advantageous state. It can be done, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Supplementary Note 24]
Pachi-slot 1 of appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, there is known a gaming machine which reports information advantageous to a player to a player so as not to lose a role decided as an internal winning combination. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this manner is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, and a period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high probability re-gaming state (RT: replay time) in which notification of information advantageous to the player is made high with a probability that replay (re-play) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also common practice to realize an advantageous advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player by performing in.

  In a gaming machine provided with such an ART function, a chance zone having a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is made to shift to the ART state with high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. There is. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internal A gaming machine is disclosed that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In a gaming machine using a chance zone, there is also known a so-called complete running chance zone in which transition to an ART state is made whenever a predetermined number of games are played in advance in the chance zone. However, in such a perfect running type chance zone, the player simply wants to continue until the chance zone has finished running, and there is a problem that the playability in the chance zone becomes monotonous. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for transition to an advantageous state for the player. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and symbol display means (eg, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. The internal winning combination is made with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detection means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel 91) the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed, and the fluctuation provided to the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Prize determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line ( For example, the main control circuit 91) and a lottery state start means (for example, a subsidiary state) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) performing a right-of-charge lottery for giving the right to perform the above-mentioned advantageous state Control circuit 101), a first right grant lottery (eg, for example, the first right grant lottery that grants the right to perform the advantageous state when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state; Transfer lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) The second right grant lottery which grants the right to perform the advantageous state with a specified probability when a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state An advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) which performs (for example, transition lottery to ART performed at the CZ completion), and a predetermined symbol combination on the effective line is displayed. When the predetermined number of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state, lottery state end means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for terminating the advantageous state lottery state and the advantageous state lottery means Number-of-rights management means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for counting the number of times of totaling the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the first right grant lottery and the second right grant lottery When the lottery state is over, it is characterized in that it comprises advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for executing the advantageous state by the total number of times counted by the right frequency management means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone), the second right granting lottery is performed when the predetermined number of unit games for which the advantageous state lottery state is ended is performed. It is possible to realize a so-called complete running type chance zone in which lottery to an advantageous state is performed at the time of the finish running. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the first right grant lottery is performed not only at the time of the complete run but also when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state, Not only does the state lottery state simply want to continue, it will also be interested in the first entitlement lottery during the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state lottery state which becomes a transition opportunity to the advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state lottery state it can.

  In addition, the advantageous state lottery state may end when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. However, if it is possible to avoid the display of a predetermined symbol combination, the advantageous state lottery state does not end. Therefore, the advantageous state lottery state can be continued according to the player's stop operation, and the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the player is in the advantageous state lottery state. The interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state ends, the advantageous state is executed by the total number of times of the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the entitlement lottery performed during the advantageous state lottery state. Do. Here, depending on the gaming machine, for example, there is also a gaming machine which grants only one right to perform an advantageous state during the advantageous state lottery state, but in such a gaming machine, the player is easily dissatisfied, in particular, In the case of a complete run type chance zone (advantage state lottery state), since only one right is obtained even if it is continued for a long time until the complete run, the player's sense of satisfaction is also halved. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the case of winning the awarding lottery a plurality of times during the advantageous state lottery state, the player is granted the right to perform the advantageous state for a plurality of times, It does not make the player feel dissatisfied. Also, for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the advantageous state lottery state does not end when the first right grant lottery is performed, then, the first right grant lottery and the second right grant lottery are performed. Further, since an opportunity to be received can be obtained, a strong interest is given to the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest of the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a second mode in which the probability of granting the right to perform the advantageous state in the first right grant lottery based on the number of unit games passed in the advantageous state lottery state is higher than itself. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) to shift to (for example, CZ mode 1), and a second mode not to shift to the first mode in which the probability is higher than the first mode and the probability is lower than itself And a mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state is not performed thereafter, the transition from the second mode to the first mode is made, so the elapsing of the advantageous state lottery state is made. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first right grant lottery increases. From the player's point of view, it is desirable for the advantageous state lottery state to last for a long time, so that there is a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. it can.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines the number of times of the unit game to shift from the first mode to the second mode when the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state. A means (for example, the sub control circuit 101 for determining CZ_MAP), and an effect means (for example, the sub control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11) for performing an effect different from the first mode in the second mode Furthermore, it is characterized by having.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can grasp or estimate that the transition from the presentation mode of the presentation means to the first mode to the second mode is made. Since the second mode is a mode in which the right to perform an advantageous state is highly likely to be granted, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation for transition to the advantageous state in the subsequent game, which is advantageous. A state of interest can be improved during the state of lottery.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi slot, 3L ... left reel, 3C ... middle reel, 3R ... right reel, 4 ... display window, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right stop button, 200 ... rotating character (movable 91) Main control circuit 101 Secondary control circuit 93 Main CPU 102 Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which the maximum value of the number of gaming media provided in unit gaming is a predetermined number,
Multiple reels with multiple symbols displayed,
Symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reel;
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player;
Symbol variation means for varying the symbol by rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of winning combinations based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel;
The symbol display means is displayed by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol;
The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means Winning determination means for determining whether or not the winning combination has been won;
If it is determined that the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been achieved by the internal winning combination determining means, the profit giving means for providing a number of game media according to the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line ,
Profit status start means for starting a profit status triggered by a predetermined condition;
Counting means for counting the number of gaming media provided by the profit giving means during a profit state;
Profit state termination means for terminating a profit state when the number of gaming media counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold;
An effect control means for controlling an effect to be executed during the profit state;
Equipped with
The effect control means is
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the start operation detected when the number of gaming media being counted by the counting means at the timing of the detection exceeds a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold value Register the profit state end effect as the effect at the end of the game according to
When the number of gaming media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold as a result of the gaming medium being provided by the profit giving means in the game according to the start operation detected by the start operation detection means, The registered profit state end effect is changed to a profit state continuous effect when the registered profit state end effect is executed and the number of gaming media counted by the counting means is equal to or less than the threshold value. And perform the profit state continuation presentation,
A game machine characterized by